9LJ < ' ~ ' 



n VMM 




i, ***F^***#< 


;i«l 




Rife 





i wmim 

®^!,j 


y 


mm 

y ferJL‘j '1 ?L-- - iHra t rag? jjfy. 4 5|$gB fl 


Pfpi 


;■■ 

->:- \gm ? 


yj •:* s . J-' ., - . < 

P|m v. -, 


LIBRARY OF CONGRESS, 


Chap3?.Z3 Copyright No,. 

Shelf., 


UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. 


ft. 

m&wam 


WL&w&Sm 

ilw ■•<: ! 




Hpf 'JlSIa 

te': ■ ; \.v:';-n:ft 

^SiH 


&fS * ; SK ’ * ‘ffTtCrra ■'■-■' .' • • • ' " 









































































































^ aV »■ 2 . t J:, : • • i 




. I 













































































♦ 














































































THE BOER BOY 

OF THE TRANSVAAL 


r 

From the German of August Niemann 
• > 

BY 

KATE MILNER RABB 


ILLUSTRATED BY F. A. CARTER 



THE PENN PUBLISHING COMPANY 
PHILADELPHIA MCM 

L • 


FZ3 


8769 


Library of Con. .h.. 

Two Copies Recf’vfh 

JUN 20 I9G0 

Copyright entiy 

2-J y /$&C 

No f 5 

SECOND COPY. 

Delivered to 

ORDLrt DIVISION, 

M 2 1900 

64461 

Copyright 1900 by The Penn Publishing Company 


4 





CONTENTS 


CHAP. page 

I In the Death Cave of Makapanspoort 7 

II Pieter Saves the Embassadors of the Zulu King . 17 

III Tiie Missionary Gives Pieter tiie History of 

the Transvaal ... ... 28 

IV The Escape of the Zulu Embassadors 37 

V A Boer Family at Home . . 45 

VI Pieter’s Race with Lord Fitzherbert 53 

VII Pieter and Fitzherbert Fall into the Hands of 

the Snake 64 

VIII The Death Sentence 75 

IX Cetewayo, the Zulu King, Greets the White 

Travelers 87 

X Royal Manoeuvres and Hunting 101 

XI The Advent of the Rainmaker 117 

XII The Departure from Zululand . . 126 

XIII Pieter Maritz Parts with the Old Missionary . . 136 

XIV The Battle of Isandula 146 

XV Pieter Meets Corporal Joubert and President 

Kruger 157 


CONTENTS 


6 

CHAP. PAGE 

XVI Pieter Maritz’s Enlistment 167 

XVII In the English Service 178 

XVIII The Advance oe the Zulus 187 

XIX The Death of Prince Louis Napoleon 198 

XX The Battle of Ulundi 209 

XXI The Capture of Cetewayo 216 

XXII From Pretoria to Kimberley 225 

XXIII A Gloomy Freedom 234 

I 

XXIV Demands of the Transvaal Government Ignored . 242 

XXV The Battle of Laing’s Nek 254 

XXVI Republic Against Monarchy 264 

XXVII Pieter in the Enemy’s Camp 272 

XXVIII The Storming of Majuba . 285 

XXIX Dr. Jameson’s Raid 302 

XXX To-day 330 

XXXI Glossary 337 


THE BOER BOY OF THE 
TRANSVAAL 


CHAPTER I 

IN THE DEATH CAVE OF MAKAPANSPOORT 

It was a hot afternoon in January — mid- 
summer in the Transvaal — and the sun beat 
down from a cloudless sky on a wounded farmer 
riding through the valley of the Nyl, near its 
source in the Waterberg. 

The horse showed signs of distress, and his 
rider, who had the powerful form of the Trans- 
vaal native, wore the rough garments of the 
Boer equipped for fighting, and was armed with 
cutlass, cartridge-belt, and gun. His right hand 
was bandaged, the breast of his blouse was 
stained with blood, his chin hung on his breast. 
Pieter Maritz Buurman, his stalwart son of four- 

7 


8 


THE BOER BOY 


teen, ran at liis side, and cast anxious glances at 
his father from time to time. 

“ I cannot keep up much longer,” said the 
elder Buurman, at last, “and these Kafirs may 
follow us at any minute. Let us try to find a 
hiding-place I once knew in this neighborhood.” 

. So saying, he turned aside toward the moun- 
tain and entered a dense thicket of cactus 
bushes, made brilliant by the yellow blossoms 
of the tall agave, the red pelargonium, and the 
umbrella-shaped, sky-blue blossoms of the Cape 
lily. In the thick shade the grass was fresh 
and green, and the horse sniffed the cool breeze 
eagerly. Intense silence prevailed, broken only 
by the cry of the baboon, sentinel of his herd. 

Presently they entered a cleft in the rock 
through which they proceeded until they ar- 
rived at an opening at the right into which the 
rider turned. It was so dark here that the boy 
could scarcely discern a deep abyss on the right 
side, and a large cavern on the left. Through 
this hall they passed on into a low, narrow cave, 
descending into another high-arched hall, and 
still another, whose floors were covered with 
running water. The next room was higher, and 
through its spacious arches the boy could look 


IN THE DEATH CAVE 


9 


far off into other subterranean chambers. Here 
his father drew rein and Pieter Maritz looked 
about him curiously. 

Great heaps of bones were scattered about 
the floor in wild confusion. Here lay a skull 
with staring eye-sockets ; there arm and thigh 
bones. Opposite, amid a great heap of human 
bones, were ox-skulls, with long, twisted horns. 
Scattered about among them were broken as- 
sagais and stabbing assagais, battle-axes, kieries, 
bows and arrows, woven mats, clay pitchers, 
Kafir drinking flasks, snuff-boxes, necklaces of 
tigers' teeth, copper arm-rings, karosses and 
tsechas. It seemed the burial ground of a whole 
people. 

The man dismounted with the assistance of 
the boy, and sank down on the thick green moss 
on a ledge of rock. 

The boy filled his flask at the underground 
stream and gave his dying father a drink. The 
wounded man spoke. 

“ You need not be afraid here. No Kafir 
dare enter this cave; they fear the dead. A 
fearful battle was fought here more than twenty 
years ago. Thousands of blacks had shut them- 
selves in this cave, but we heaped burning 


10 


THE BOER BOY 


bushes in the entrance and they all perished in 
the smoke. 

“ We have had to conquer this land with dif- 
ficulty, ” lie continued after a pause. “ Either 
our blood must flow or that of our enemy. . . . 
Let me drink again ; my blood burns. I fear 
the arrow that struck my hand was poisoned. 
I feel that the end is near. Greet your 
mother and brothers and sister for me. And 
you, Pieter, be a good boy, and love your 
country. Be faithful and good and true and 
brave, and remember that your father helped to 
buy this country with his life. 

“ We have only one enemy,” he said, after a 
moment’s silence, “ England. The English 
united with the Zulus against us not so very 
long ago, and these miserable Kafirs would 
never have dared to stand against us to-day had 
they not been instigated by the English. The 
hand of the English has killed your father, 
Pieter Maritz ; do not forget it.” 

“ I shall never forget it,” said the boy firmly. 

The father looked long and earnestly on the 
boy’s open face ; a shudder passed through his 
frame, his limbs trembled, and all was over. 

Pieter wept bitterly, kneeling there in the 


IN THE DEATH CAVE 


11 


dusk of the cave by his father’s side. Then he 
arose and thought of his own fate. He must re- 
turn to his own people, but how to find them ? 
The community of Boers to which he belonged 
had left their station because of the hostility of 
the neighboring tribe of Becliuanas. They had 
met in battle, which in attack and pursuit had 
covered wide stretches of country. Where was 
his community now ? 

There was no time to be lost. He hung the 
heavy gun and wide cartridge-belt over his 
shoulders, and, shortening the stirrup straps, 
mounted the horse. He gave one backward 
glance, the remembrance of which was im- 
printed forever on his mind, and rode out the 
way he had come. When lie came through 
the cleft in the rock he j^rceived that it was 
near sunset. He turned his horse to the right 
to return as they had come, but the horse re- 
sisted, and seemed determined to go to the left. 
He set his forefeet firmly on the ground and 
began to rear. 

“Very well, old Jager,” said Pieter, “ per- 
haps you know better than I which is the right 
way.” 

He dropped the reins on the horse’s neck and 


12 


THE BOER BOY 


Jager immediately started forward at a rapid 
pace. 

With great skill, as if he were at home in the 
wilderness, the horse avoided the prickly bushes 
of the cactus and the giraffe-acacia, and found 
his way through the almost impenetrable forest 
and into a rocky valley. In this valley the path 
wound zigzag between bushes and stones ; tower- 
like rocks arose on either side, and the deep 
silence was broken only by the grunts of ba- 
boons that accompanied the rider at a distance, 
leaping from stone to stone. Gradually these 
animals increased in 'number, and as Jager 
snorted they began to grin and to call loudly 
until hundreds ran in from all sides. They 
even approached Pieter, grinning at him, 
stretching their mouths, and wrinkling their 
foreheads as if inviting attack. Pieter took his 
rifle from his shoulder and threatened them. 
He did not shoot, however, for he knew too well 
the nature of the animals. If he had wounded 
one of them, they would have torn him to 
pieces before he could have fired another shot. 

Deliverance soon came from this peril. The 
narrow valley suddenly opened into a wide 
plain, and the hateful apes crowded together 


IN THE DEATH CAVE 


13 


at the exit as if holding counsel as to what 
they should do. Pieter, throwing his gun over 
his shoulder, urged Jager forward into the 
open. 

The sun sank below the horizon and com- 
plete darkness fell over the earth. Pieter 
looked anxiously around him. Should he stop 
the horse and pass the night on the open plain ? 
But already he heard in the distance the cries 
of the jackals and hyenas, who had left their 
hiding-places to seek their prey. Should he 
attempt by starlight to reach some thicket, 
where he could kindle a. fire to keep off the 
beasts of prey ? But he feared the light of the 
fire would attract wandering Kafirs. He deter- 
mined to remain in the saddle and trust himself 
entirely to the horse. 

The stars soon began to shine brilliantly and 
the crescent moon appeared. But while, with 
the light, tranquillity fell on the boy’s spirits, 
he became immediately thereupon attentive to 
the fact that the wilderness had now become 
alive. The distant howling laughs and barks 
of the hyenas and jackals increased and came 
nearer. Jager also heard and understood these 
mysterious sounds. He leaped to one side, snift- 


14 


THE BOER BOY 


ing the air for signs of peril, and his j^ace became 
less measured. 

All at once a new sound echoed through the 
wilderness, and for a time silenced all others. 
It came from a remote distance, and, while not 
loud, there was a shuddering power in the long 
resounding roar. Jager fixed his four feet firmly 
on the ground, and drew himself together; his 
flanks trembled; he had recognized the voice of 
the lion. Then he sprang forward with a great 
leap so that Pieter was nearly unseated in 
the saddle, and on they went in a swift gallop. 
His weariness had disappeared, and anxiety 
seemed to lend him wings. Yet, again and 
a third time, after a long pause, the powerful 
tone sounded, silencing other weaker animals, 
and this time it seemed to come nearer. No 
blow could have increased Jager’s speed. 
Pieter gave him the reins and trusted himself 
fully to the instinct of the noble animal. He 
noticed that the horse continued in a certain 
direction, and even in his anxiety did not 
swerve from it. Straight as an arrow he ran 
to the southeast, passing over mile after mile. 
The night wind whistled through the boy’s hair 
and swept back Jager’s long mane and tail. 


IN THE DEATH CAVE 


15 


Would they continue ever thus, without reach- 
ing the goal until exhaustion put an end to the 
race? 

Then the boy became aware of a faint light 
near the earth, reddening the horizon just before 
him. It became clearer as he advanced, and 
glad hope made his heart beat more rapidly. 
He knew that the red light could come only 
from a great fire, and that where the fire was 
there must be men also. His hope did not de- 
ceive him. Soon he saw the red flames of sev- 
eral camp fires, and the smoke and soot of the 
burning rhenoster bushes. 

He shouted for joy as he came nearer. The 
faithful, shrewd horse had brought him to his 
own. In a large circle stood the white-covered 
wagons ; long-horned oxen were tied fast to 
these wagons, and others were gathered in a 
pen encircled by a rope. Several fires blazed 
within the wagon citadel. Pieter pushed into 
the circle of wagons, and saw assembled at the 
largest of the fires a company of Boers, men and 
women, among them his own family. They were 
listening to the evening devotional exercises 
which were held by a portly man with uncov- 
ered white head and long white beard. Pieter 


16 


THE BOER BOY 


did not recognize this man, but knew from 
his pronunciation of Dutch that he must 
be a German. The front part of one of the 
wagons served as a pulpit, in which he stood 
above the silent and devout congregation. His 
noble face was illuminated by the firelight. He 
spoke of the desolation caused by the last bat- 
tle, and consoled his hearers for their loss. 
Finally, he gave out the hymn with a strong 
voice, and the assembled Boers sang with trust 
and veneration in their voices. 


CHAPTER II 


PIETER SAVES THE EMBASSADORS OF THE ZULU 
KING 

Pieter related the sad story of his father’s 
death to the assembled Boers, and then went 
to his mother, who received the news in bitter 
silence. Scant slumber that night came to 
him as he rolled uneasily on his bed of bushes. 
He was aroused at dawn by a confusion of voices 
and noisy threats among the black servants, 
whom he found hurrying through the camp 
with two black prisoners. Pieter followed to 
where a number of Boer councillors were 
already assembled. The entire camp was shortly 
in an uproar, with angry Boers and blacks clam- 
oring for the immediate execution of the pris- 
oners. The strangers were tall, slender, and 
powerful. Their black bodies and legs, naked 
to the waist, glistened as if rubbed with oil. 

17 


2 


18 


THE BOER BOY 


They stood erect and haughty, scorning the 
inferior blacks surrounding them. Their hair 
was ingeniously arranged in stiff curls, plastered 
with grease, and their bodies were less thickly 
anointed with oil than the Kafirs. 

The servants reported that they had discov- 
ered the strangers near the missionary’s wagon 
and believed them to be spies. One of the 
Boers interrogated the intruders. They made 
no reply, evidently not understanding Dutch, 
but pointed toward the missionary’s wagon, 
attempting to explain by signs that they belonged 
to him. 

The Boers were suspicious and in ill-liumor. 
An aged councilor with long, iron-gray beard 
said quietly : “ These rascals have not come here 
for any good. So long as they cannot explain, 
the safest course would be to shoot them.” 

His companions murmured apj^rovingly, and 
two of the Boers threw their guns over their 
shoulders and nodded to the servants to lead 
the prisoners into the open field. 

Pieter, full of sympathy, longed to help the 
strangers, yet how dared he, a boy, oppose the 
elders of the community ? As he thought 
thus, one of the condemned men, realizing what 


PIETER SAVES THE EMBASSADORS 19 

was about to happen, pushed back the servants 
who held him and cried in broken English that 
he and his companion were under the protection 
of the missionary, and that they were embassa- 
dors of the Zulu king. The word Zulu, struck 
all present with terror. 

“ Zulu !” cried the graybeard Boer. “ They 
are Zulus and speak the language of our enemy. 
It is sufficient. We will shoot them before 
they can do further harm. ,, 

At this Pieter ran to the missionary’s wagon, 
aroused the old man, and led him to the 
place of execution. 

Already the Boers were ready to fire while 
the Zulus stood proudly and scornfully awaiting 
death. 

“ Stop ! stop !” cried the missionary. “ Shed 
not the blood of innocent people ! I conjure 
you, Baas,” he continued, turning to the elder, 
“ let these people go. They are the. embassadors 
of Cetewayo, the powerful Zulu king, sent out 
to inform themselves concerning Christianity.” 

Baas was in an ugly temper and retorted : 
“ Cetewayo troubles himself little about Christi- 
anity, old friend. He wishes to commit robbery 
and murder, and these people are his spies. He 


20 


THE BOER BOY 


has missionaries in his own land from whom he 
can learn Christianity.” 

“ I beg of you to listen to a man who has 
preached the Gospel in this land for half a cen- 
tury,” cried the missionary. “ You are angry 
because you had to fight the blacks only yes- 
terday, and I have equal reason, for they burned 
the house in which for ten years I have taught 
the gospel of love ; but I would not be worthy 
to be a servant of Christ, did I allow such 
hatred to creep into my heart. Besides, these are 
men of another race.” 

“ They are Zulus,” replied Baas van der Goot, 
“ and continually molest our frontier. Two 
years ago they assisted the English against us. 
They speak the language of our enemy, Let 
us waste no more words, but put them to 
death.” 

Again the selected marksmen raised their 
weapons, but again the missionary interposed. 

“ They speak English because they have 
traveled with English merchants. They have 
traveled hundreds of miles to visit the mission 
station ; on their return they will spread the 
Gospel in the land of darkness. You commit a 
great sin in shedding their blood.” 


PIETER SAVES THE EMBASSADORS 21 


A grim smile appeared on the face of the old 
Boer. 

“ My friend, ” he said, “ I will not go so far 
as to declare that you deceive us, although at 
such a time it would be well to beware of every 
one who is not of Dutch blood. But these 
rascals are sly and deceive you. They are sent 
out as spies.” 

“ We missionaries do not concern ourselves 
with politics,” cried the missionary, hotly. 
“ We are all brothers. In proof, you see this 
holy text. It belonged to your great country- 
man, Van der Kemp, who gave it to the 
Englishman Moffat, my teacher, who, in turn, 
gave it to me.” 

With these words the missionary drew from 
his pocket a New Testament in Dutch, tattered 
and yellow from long use, and showed it to the 
Boers, who examined it reverently. 

“ ‘ Dr. Johann Theodosius van der Kemp, 
1799/ ” read Baas van der Goot. “ ‘Acquaint 
all nations with your mercy ; the Lord is 
near.’ ” 

“ What would you do if I let these Zulus 
go?” he asked the missionary, after a pause. 
“ Where would you go ?” 


22 


THE BOER BOY 


“You know that necessity brought me to 
you yesterday. I will now continue my jour- 
ney to the southeast to establish another mission 
where God indicates a favorable spot to me. 
Let these two strangers remain with me, or 
return home, as they will.” 

“ It is well,” said the elder. “ Go in peace.” 

“ And with you rest the peace of God.” 

And the missionary extended his hands in 
blessing. Then he turned back to his wagon, 
followed by the Zulus, in whose eyes he read 
deep emotion. 

Baas called Pieter aside. 

“You are now nearly grown,” said the elder. 
“ I hope you are worthy of your father and 
mother. I suspect these Zulus, and as I cannot 
spare a man, I want you to go with the mission- 
ary, to see that these treacherous blacks do not 
slip away to spy in our cities south and east. 
If the Zulus turn toward Lydenburg or Pretoria 
shoot them down. It is an important commis- 
sion for one of your years. You must be watch- 
ful. Do you understand ?” 

“ I do,” replied the boy, flushing with pride. 

Great activity prevailed about the mission- 
ary^ wagon. The three black servants, Jan, 


PIETER SAVES THE EMBASSADORS 


23 


Kobus, and Christian, loosed the thongs with 
which the legs of the oxen were bound together, 
and with loud cries drove the long-liorned 
animals in a row. They had inch-thick goads 
of rhinoceros hide, the terrible sjambocks, whose 
blows left long stripes on the bodies of the oxen. 
They arranged the animals in pairs, calling each 
by his name. Then they placed them along the 
draw-line, woven of many thongs and provided 
with a wooden yoke bound to the horns with 
cords. 

Had Baas van der Goot heard the conversa- 
tion of the Zulus during these arrangements he 
might have thought his suspicions not altogether 
unfounded. “The Boers do not like to hear 
the English language,” said one. “ And the 
English are the enemies of the Zulus. Why, 
then, will the Boers kill the Zulus ? Have we 
not the same enemies ?” 

The missionary was unpleasantly impressed 
by these words, and he looked keenly at the 
Zulus. Never before had they spoken of such 
things, but only of the Christian religion. 

“ The Boers are Christians, like the English,” 
he answered, “ and neither are enemies of the 
Zulus, but would like to make them happy while 


24 


THE BOER BOY 


they teach them of the great God who made all 
things.’’ 

The Zulu smiled. “ My father has lived for 
a long time in a lonely region,” he said, “ and 
perhaps knows nothing of frontier troubles. 
Perhaps these Boers do not know, or they would 
not have turned their rifles against us.” 

“ I do not trouble myself about war and com- 
merce,” said the missionary. “ I teach peace to 
all men.” 

The younger of the Zulus hastened to change 
the subject. “ Cetewayo is very strong,” said 
he. “ He is the mighty elephant, the king of 
kings, the king of heaven. He will be very 
thankful to our father for what he has done for 
us. Will our father permit us to accompany 
him further? Humbati and Molihabantschi 
cannot feel safe in this district.” 

“ I prefer to have you to go your own way,” 
replied the missionary. “ Go home as soon as 
possible. You see how dangerous it is among 
the Boers, and I may not always be able to pro- 
tect you.” 

“ My father is very powerful and very kind,” 
said the elder Zulu. “ He will not leave us to 
be slain. Cetewayo will reward the missionaries 


PIETER SAVES THE EMBASSADORS 25 

in his lands for the good our father does. Our 
father will permit us to travel further in his 
protection. We will keep ourselves concealed 
in the rolling houses when we meet other white 
people.” 

As the missionary stood, undetermined, Baas 
van der Goot and Pieter appeared. 

“ My friend,” said Baas to the missionary, 
“ you are an aged man and the black rogues in 
your service will give you much care on the 
journey, I will send this young man with you 
as a guide and protector.” 

“ It is well,” said the missionary. “ Pieter 
Maritz may guide me, but God will protect me. 
Let us start.” 

The oxen were now hitched, twelve pairs 
along the trektouw or draw line. The long rope 
on which all must pull lay on the backs of 
some, and on the ground between others. Two 
of the servants went to the head of the line to 
direct them, while the third sat in the front of 
the wagon with a long whip. Suddenly whirl- 
ing the great whip in the air and cracking it 
over the yoke of the second team, he shouted, 
“ Trek !” The oxen understood the command 
and instantly started forward ; the hard rope 


26 


THE BOER BOY 


stretched over their backs and pulled them into 
position, and the ponderous machinery was set 
in motion. 

The great covered wagon was perhaps eigh- 
teen feet long, seven feet wide, and heavily built 
of massive timbers with thick, iron-bound 
wheels. Its arched, linen cover certainly made 
it resemble a “ rolling house,” as the Zulus 
styled it. 

The noise and shouts of the blacks did not 
cease. Jan and Christian ran like mad up and 
down the line, calling each ox by name. From 
his seat, Kobus swung a whip thirty feet long. 
Where its lasli struck the oxen the blood 
streamed over their sides. Jan and Christian 
flayed the foremost pair with the cruel sjam- 
bocks, making thick, bloody welts on their 
shoulders and flanks. 

Under this discipline, although the wagon 
was heavy and the ground sandy, the oxen 
drew their shaking, creaking burden at a swift 
trot. This would not do, however, as it would 
too soon exhaust their strength. Jan, who led 
the two foremost oxen by a riem bound to their 
horns, loosed it, fell back with astonishing agil- 
ity, took up a stone and threw it with great skill 


PIETER SAVES THE EMBASSADORS 27 


just between the horns of one of the first pair. 
The ox slackened his speed, and likewise his 
neighbor. 

“ Avanliou ! Avanliou !” shouted all three 
servants. Thereupon they seized other stones 
and threw them at the foreheads of the oxen, 
quickly moderating their pace in this novel 
manner. 

The missionary rode behind the wagon, and 
beside him walked the swift-footed Zulus. 
Pieter, with ears alert, brought up the rear. 
But his young mind was soon to be shown no 
match for the cunning of the Zulus. 

The camp of the Boers disappeared behind 
them, and the blue* column of smoke from the 
great circle of wagons gradually disappeared in 
the clear air. Before them was displayed in 
the splendor of the morning a wide land, full 
of beauty and danger. Little did Pieter 
guess wliat it held in store for him, and how 
many months fraught with perilous happenings 
would pass by before he saw once more the 
campfires of his own community. 


CHAPTER III 


THE MISSIONARY GIVES PIETER THE HISTORY OF 
THE TRANSVAAL 

The country through which the travelers 
passed was very level, and because of the clear- 
ness of the atmosphere, objects could be seen at 
a great distance. As they advanced, the sand 
plain of the north gave place to prairies cov- 
ered with high grass, on which herds of liarte- 
beestes and wildebeestes were pasturing. Flights 
of partridges, guinea fowls, and pheasants arose 
before the wagon. As the journey continued, 
the grass, at first so tall that it met above the 
horns of the oxen, became lower and was studded 
with many bright, fragrant flowers. 

By noon the landscaj>e changed again. Little 
hills alternated with green valleys, through 
which rippled limpid brooks. Near one of 
these small streams they passed the night, the 
28 


A HISTORY OF THE TRANSVAAL 


29 


place being well suited for a camp, except that 
the growth near the river was so full of sap 
that it was impossible to collect enough dry 
wood to keep up a camp fire during the night 
as a protection against wild beasts. 

When night fell the travelers collected in a 
circle about the embers of the little fire by 
which supper had been cooked. Pieter had 
his gun; the Zulus, their assagais. The mission- 
ary was busied with a sextant with which he 
intended to reckon the height of certain stars, 
and in order to read the figures on the vernier, 
had beside him a little lantern containing a 
magnesium light. 

Before he began this work, however, he talked 
for a time with Pieter, who had asked him 
about the first settlers in South Africa. 

“ The Dutch came to the Cape first,” said the 
boy. “ My father once told me that all this 
country belonged to the Dutch, but that the 
English had taken it away from us.” 

“ A Portuguese sailor, Bartholomew Diaz, 
first made the long voyage around the southern 
point of Africa,” began the missionary. “ He 
came in 1486, with three ships, to Sierra Parda, 
on the coast of Namaqualand, where he planted 


30 


THE BOER BOY 


a cross, but did not remain. Eleven years later 
another Portuguese, Vasco da Gama, landed in 
Natal, taking possession in the name of his 
king, and sailing thence to India. More than 
one hundred years after this the Dutch founded 
a colony at the Cape of Good Hope. On the 
6th of April, 1652, four Dutch ships anchored 
in the bay at Table Mountain, and nearly one 
hundred colonists, under the leadership of the 
bold Jan van Piebek, landed and built a little 
fortress. They founded a trading company 
connected with the East India Company, and 
began to trade with the Hottentots for ivory, 
ostrich feathers, and other products of the 
country. As they prospered the States General 
of Holland sent out to them a large number of 
girls from the poorhouses and orphans’ homes, 
and so families were founded. 

“ More emigrants continued to come from 
Holland, among them bad people who deceived 
and mistreated the natives. It is said that the 
Hottentots were honorable, gentle, and amiable 
people, who kept their word religiously and re- 
spected justice. They lived on fruits, vege- 
tables, roots, and milk, and many were over a 
hundred years old, some one hundred and thirty 


A HISTORY OF THE TRANSVAAL 


31 


and even one hundred and fifty. But when 
they began to eat the cooked food of the Euro- 
peans, and to drink rum, they became greedy 
and drunken, contracted many diseases, lost 
their virtues, and no longer lived to old age. 
Then they made war upon the Europeans, and 
were made their slaves, or became robbers, called 
Bushmen, and fell in battle, so that now they 
are scattered over the lands that were once 
thickly peopled by them. 

“ But the Europeans continually increased. 
In the years from 1685 to 1688, after the revo- 
cation of the Edict of Nantes, nearly four thou- 
sand French Protestants came here. They 
worshiped with the Dutch, as did also the Ger- 
mans, who came in large numbers, and all to- 
gether called themselves Boers — that is, peasants 
— people who carry on agriculture and stock- 
raising. The Boers conquered all the country 
round about, and in the year 1774 they sent 
out bodies of soldiers called commandoes, by 
which they extended their rule even to the 
Orange and V aal Rivers. 

a Now a new and powerful people appeared, 
who showed themselves superior to the Boers. 
Proud England, who sends to all points of the 


32 


THE BOER BOY 


earth her ships, her traders, and her soldiers, 
appeared at the Cape. In 1806 the colonists 
had to suffer patiently the sovereignty of Britain 
in Cape Colony, and what the industry, cour- 
age, and also the unjust greed of the Boers had 
taken from the Hottentots, fell now to the 
stronger robbers. Angrily the Boers moved 
farther to the north in order to live under their 
own instead of British laws, and in the year 
1837 established themselves in the countries 
which we now call the Orange Free State and 
the Transvaal. In 1848, after an open battle 
with the English, they founded, under Andreas 
Pnetorius, on the right bank of the Vaal Biver, 
the Transvaal State, and in 1854 the settlers on 
the left bank of the Vaal Biver, between the 
Orange and Vaal Bivers, declared themselves 
independent and called their country the Orange 
Free State, although the English Governor of 
Cape Colony, Sir Henry George Smith, had, on 
February 3d, 1848, declared the Queen of Eng- 
land sovereign of all this country. This has very 
much embittered the Boers, and who knows what 
wars and terrible happenings may arise there- 
from ?” 

Pieter listened to this story attentively ; he 


A HISTORY OF THE TRANSVAAL 33 

was very glad to learn something of his country. 
He looked at the missionary with sparkling 
eyes, and said, clasping his gun barrel : “ My 
father said yesterday, when he died, that the 
Englishmen were our enemies, and I hope that 
we may soon show them on which side the right 
is.” 

The missionary did not answer, for suddenly 
there arose a great bellowing among the oxen, 
followed by a frightful roar near by that seemed 
to shake the earth. At this sound the oxen ran 
in every direction, and the horses tied to the 
wagons began to rear and paw the ground. The 
Zulus seized their assagais and Pieter caught up 
his gun, while the missionary lifted his lantern 
and threw the light about the circle to see where 
the danger threatened. 

There, in an opening in the bushes directly 
opposite the river, not thirty feet away, stood 
two immense lions, their great heads covered by 
long yellow manes, their eyes fixed before them, 
so near that in the bright light one could count 
the stiff black hairs on their upper lips. They 
were evidently blinded by the light, and hence 
stood motionless. 

Pieter raised his gun to his shoulder and 


3 


34 


THE BOER BOY 


touched the trigger. There was a flash, a report, 
and the larger of the two lions fell, shot in the 
right eye. The other lion crouched, and before 
the boy could aim a second time leaped forward 
at a venture. He touched the ground just 
before the marksman, where the light did not 
blind him. In another instant a blow from his 
lifted paw would have killed the boy. But in 
that instant, quick as a lightning flash, two dark, 
athletic forms sprang forward, and two assagai 
points buried themselves in the lion’s brain and 
heart. Thus did Humbati and Molihabantschi 
repay their debt of gratitude to the Boer boy. 

The next morning the Zulus started out for 
a hunt while the servants collected the scat- 
tered crxen. Pieter, mindful of his commission, 
joined them, and the three went forward together 
through the tall grass. 

Soon Humbati gave a low call, Jager pricked 
up his ears, and Pieter saw in the distance the 
fine spiral horns of two of the large species of 
antelope — the koodoo — above the high grass. 

Had the Zulus been alone they might have 
slipped up on the animals unnoticed, but the 
keen scent of the antelojies perceived the pres- 
ence of the horse at a long distance, and they 



THE ZULUS KEPT PACE WITH THE HORSE 








































































































































\ 






A HISTORY OF THE TRANSVAAL 


35 


were soon skimming over tlie plain in great 
leaps. Their pursuers were swift as well. 
Jager’s passion for hunting was aroused, and 
he fairly flew, his youthful rider giving him the 
rein and holding his gun ready for instant use. 

But how astonished was Pieter to see 
the Zulus keeping pace with his swift horse ! 
The Kafirs, the Becliuanas, the Hottentots, and 
the Namaquas were, it is true, skilled runners, 
but never had he seen men of such swiftness as 
these nobles of the most warlike of all the 
South African peoples. Where the grass was 
low and the ground very level the Zulus fell 
behind Jager, but where the grass hindered the 
horse, and there were bushes or the road went 
up and down hill, the runners gained the ad- 
vantage. Their slender, shining, black forms 
glided through the bushes as nimbly as ser- 
pents, and the long, blue crane feathers in their 
curled hair waved behind them as they raced 
along, assagais held aloft. 

Jager himself seemed to feel that the stake 
was the skill of his master as well as the rare 
antelope, and ran as he had never run before. 
Now his brown skin was torn in a thorn tree 
thicket, which hindered not the Zulus. Now 


36 


THE BOER BOY 


lie crossed with difficulty a swamp, whose miry 
surface was thickly set with white callas, blue 
cape lilies, and brilliant orchids, but the Zulu 
warriors glided over it as if winged. Now he 
plunged into a silver river, but while he still 
fought the flood the Zulus were already flying 
over the next hill, the drops of water rolling 
from their greasy bodies. 

Pieter set his teeth. Here where mountain 
and valley alternated, he must lose the race. 
As he came up the hill he saw the Zulus, already 
more than two hundred paces in advance. He 
could now see the antelopes distinctly, for their 
pace had slackened, their strength was ex- 
hausted. The rapidity of the Zulus now in- 
creased. From either side they ran toward the 
antelopes with high-poised assagais. In a mo- 
ment the prey would be theirs. 

Pieter suddenly checked his horse. The 
distance was long, but he knew the range of his 
rifle. The horse seemed to understand ; he 
stood still as if cast from bronze. Pieter 
brought his gun to his shoulder, there was a 
report and still another. He shouted aloud as 
both antelopes fell to the ground. 


CHAPTER IV 


THE ESCAPE OF THE ZULU EMBASSADORS 

“ My young friend lias a sure eye and a steady 
hand,” said Humbati, when the three hunters 
found themselves together again with the slain 
antelopes. “ Surely there are not many men 
among the Boers who shoot so well as lie.” 

“ I am only a boy,” said Pieter, “ I have yet 
to learn to shoot as the Boers do.” 

Humbati was silent for a moment. Then he 
continued : “ There are a great many Boers. 
Their number is great and many dwell in 
wagons and tents and many also in houses. 
Yet there are many more English warriors and 
they will make the Boers their slaves.” 

The boy’s eyes flashed scornfully. “ That 
will never happen,” he cried, “ so long as a 
Boer lives and can carry weapons.” 


37 


38 


THE BOER BOY 


“ My young friend is right,” said Humbati. 
“ Noble men would rather die than live among 
the poor and have no share in the banquets 
of the great. The great King Cetewayo loves 
the Boers, for he knows they are soldiers. 
If the Boers would help this mighty king 
against the English they would help him against 
their own enemy. Humbati and Molihabant- 
schi wanted to say this to the wise men among 
the Boers, but the Boers wished to slay the 
embassadors of the king. My young friend is 
very wise although he is still young. He can 
advise Humbati and Molihabantschi as to how 
they must act to assure the Boers of the friend- 
ship of Cetewayo.” 

With consummate shrewness the Zulu had 
chosen the moment for his speech when the boy 
was intoxicated with joy and pride. Pieter 
was almost ready to help the embassador, 
but he suddenly bethought himself of his com- 
mission from Baas van der Goot. 

“ Do young boys among the Zulus give advice 
to their elders ?” he asked, smiling. “ I can 
give you but one bit of advice,” he continued, 
while the embassadors exchanged meaning 
glances, marveling at his answer, “ and that is 


THE ESCAPE OF THE EMBASSADORS 39 


to return quickly to your home, for the Boers 
do not trust you, because Cetewayo has often 
come into our country with his army and driven 
away cattle and burned villages.’ , 

The Zulus exchanged glances as they busied 
themselves in cutting up the animals with their 
assagai blades. Soon after their arrival at the 
camp a meal was prepared, coffee and corn being 
cooked over the fires and the meat roasted on 
spits. The Zulu warriors, however, prepared 
their meat in their own fashion. They laid the 
back of the antelope on the coals and turned it 
with a stick to prevent burning. Then they 
drew it out, devoured all that was cooked, and 
threw the rest back on the coals. 

After the meal the journey was resumed. 
The road was now bare and sandy and the sun 
was intensely hot, so that the sand glowed like 
molten metal. Bleaching skeletons of cattle 
were scattered along the way, the long, crooked, 
black horns rising above the staring white 
skulls. Far in the distance a herd of zebras 
was seen running across the plain. 

After three hours the oxen began to show 
signs of great thirst ; their tongues hung from 
their mouths, their heads drooped. It was 


40 


THE BOER BOY 


evident tliat they could go no farther without 
water, and of water there was no sign. The 
missionary ordered the animals unhitched and 
gave each of them a little drink from the water 
cask. Then, leaving them with the servants, 
he set off across the plain, accompanied the 
Zulus and Pieter, toward a distant hill, where 
they hoped to find water. 

They were disappointed. The hill was sandy 
and rocky, and they had to cross it and go a 
long distance to a little valley, among whose 
trees and shrubs they found a small, muddy 
pond. 

“ Let us return for the oxen,” said the mis- 
sionary. “ I have decided to go on to the mis- 
sion station at Botschabelo, and this detour will 
prolong my journey another day, but it cannot 
be helped.” 

Pieter noticed that the Zulus became atten- 
tive when they caught the name Botschabelo, 
but he thought nothing more of it at the time, 
as they hastened their return to the suffering 
oxen. 

The water that remained in the cask was 
shared among the oxen to give them fresh 
courage, and the weary animals set their last 


THE ESCAPE OF THE EMBASSADORS 41 

strength to the task and wallowed through the 
heavy sand and over the rocky hill toward the 
little valley, where trees and bushes indicated 
the place of the pond. 

Now a wind began to blow toward the little 
caravan, with a strange, fresh breath. It came 
from the east, and had a tang of fresh grass, so 
that the oxen sniffed it eagerly and pressed for- 
ward more rapidly, shaking their yokes as if 
impatient not to be able to run unhindered. 
Presently the wind became stronger and made a 
strange, howling noise, as it passed over the hill. 
The sky darkened suddenly, and the travelers 
saw the light clouds that at noon had clustered 
close about the horizon had now risen and, 
like mountains of snow, hastened towards the 
wind. 

The howling of the wind suddenly ceased, 
and a death-like silence fell on the plain. The 
wind and the cloud- mountains had met for a 
battle and made their preparations silently. The 
oxen stopped, trembling violently, and drove 
their hoofs into the sand. 

“ Outspan them !” cried the missionary. “ A 
hurricane is coming !” 

While the blacks hastened to loosen the heavy 


42 


THE BOER BOY 


yokes the sky showed a remarkable change. 
The sharply-defined mountain-like clouds were 
still flying rapidly to the northeast, but in the 
opposite direction there now came drifting veil- 
like clouds of uncertain form, much nearer the 
earth. As these cloud layers approached each 
other the sun completely disappeared, it became 
perfectly dark, and all the while the same mys- 
terious silence reigned. Then the terrible tem- 
pest broke. The lightning sprang from sky to 
earth in slanting lines, in curves, zigzag, in 
chains, and again rolled on the ground like 
fiery serpents winding themselves about the herd. 
The thunder crashed incessantly and a flood of 
rain poured down from the clouds. 

In the lightning flashes, Pieter saw that the 
terror-stricken oxen had disappeared, that the 
frightened blacks had taken refuge under the 
wagon, whose cover, torn loose by the wind, 
fluttered like a giant flag, and that the mission- 
ary stood by his horse, his hands clasped over 
his breast, his face turned toward the sky, his 
whole attitude expressive of devotion. 

The torrents washed loose sand and rocks 
from the hills, and the stream of water flowing 
through the valley rose so high that the mis- 


THE ESCAPE OF THE EMP.ASSADORS 43 

sionary and Pieter had to lead their horses up 
on the hillside, where they were followed by the 
frightened black servants. The downpour was 
not of long duration, however. In a little while 
the thunder and lightning ceased and the sun 
shone for a while. Then the clouds again col- 
lected and rain fell until sunset, when the sky 
cleared and the valley was lighted by the moon 
and stars. 

The dripping travelers now descended the 
hill and endeavored to find the oxen. Not a 
trace of them could be seen, and the dismal roar- 
ing of the lions warned the party to give over 
the search until morning. 

As a fire could not be kindled because every- 
thing was soaking wet, the missionary deter- 
mined to pass the night in the wagon, and Pieter 
volunteered to stand guard. All at once a 

thought struck him that sent a thrill of terror 
© 

through his limbs. 

“ Where are the Zulus?” he cried. 

“ They have found shelter somewhere,” said 
the missionary. “ These people are more 
familiar with nature than we.” 

Pieter said nothing, but he did not believe 
that they were in the neighborhood. He was 


44 


THE BOER BOY 


very anxious. He could not go in search of 
them ; what should he do ? All night, as he 
stood, gun in hand, in the darkness, he looked 
about unceasingly, in the hope of seeing some- 
thing that would console him for the fear that 
tormented him of having failed in his commis- 
sion. But only the howling of the panther and 
hyena and the roar of the lion broke the silence 
of the night. Once he thought he saw Moli- 
habantschi’s sparkling eyes, but in the next 
instant he saw that they were the eyes of a great 
hyena that had slipped up unobserved by the 
weary horse that stood sleeping, tied to the 
wagon. 

Pieter took aim at the hyena, and when 
the shot cracked, it fell, mortally wounded. 
The terrified sleepers awoke, but soon fell asleep 
again, their fears quieted by the boy. Then 
all was still, for the sound of the weapon had 
silenced the wilderness. But the boy did not 
rest; he was still making conjectures regarding 
the vanished embassadors of the Zulu king. 


CHAPTER V 

A BOER FAMILY AT HOME 

“ Why are you so sad, my son ? What is the 
matter? Surely something is troubling you,” 
said the missionary to Pieter Maritz on the 
morning after the storm. “ Confide in me ; it 
will ease your heart.” 

The boy shook his head obstinately. 

“ You have been a pleasant companion,” be- 
gan the missionary again, “ but I fear you are 
homesick, and I must not keep you longer. By 
evening, with your swift horse, you can be with 
your family again.” 

Pieter bit his lip. “ I shall not go back,” he 
said. 

“ Do you not desire to see your family again ? ” 

The boy was silent. 

“ You are surely not afraid to ride back 
alone?” 


45 


46 


THE BOER BOY 


Pieter smiled scornfully and again shook his 
head. 

“ Well, then,” said the missionary, “ I know 
what troubles you. It was not his concern for 
me that caused Baas van der Goot to send you 
with me. It was distrust of the Zulus. And 
their disappearance is troubling you. Am I not 
right ?” 

The boy’s reserve melted under the old man’s 
friendly interest. “Yes,” he said, “I was to 
watch over the Zulus; and now I can never 
return home again.” 

“ Why not ?” 

“ Because I should be too much ashamed of 
myself. I can give no answer when asked how 
I carried out my commission.” 

“ Tell the truth ; that the Zulus escaped in a 
terrible storm when you had enough to do to 
take care of yourself.” 

The boy shrugged his shoulders. “ They 
have gone and I should have kept guard over 
them.” 

The missionary told the boy that Baas van 
der Goot could not desire impossibilities. He 
promised to send a letter, in which he would 
explain the Zulus’ disappearance. He admon- 


A BOER FAMILY AT HOME 


47 


ished Pieter to return and take his punishment 
if necessary. But the boy persisted in his de- 
termination. 

“ Some day,” he said, “ I may be able to 
render my fatherland a service that will atone 
for my fault. Then I can return again, but 
now I will not. I like you, sir ; let me stay 
with you.” 

“ He is very obstinate, but when he has time 
to think he will recover his senses,” thought the 
missionary, and concluded to say no more. 

After an hour on the road Pieter observed a 
change in the landscape. There were occa- 
sional settlements, and the forests now alter- 
nated with cultivated fields of sugar, coffee, 
cotton, rice, corn, and wheat. They were in the- 
neighborhood of Lydenburg, between the 
streams that empty into the Olifants. 

Toward evening they approached a large, 
white, gabled farmhouse, set in the midst of 
irrigated fields. Orange trees grew in the stone- 
walled gardens, and many herds of cattle were 
grazing in the broad fields. Pieter rode up to 
the stout, gray-bearded man who leaned, pipe in 
mouth and hands in leather trousers pockets, 
against the doorpost. 


48 


THE BOER BOY 


“ Good-day, uncle,” he called, after the custom 
of the country. 

“ Good-day, nephew,” answered the Boer, 
without moving. 

“ Will you entertain us for the night ?” asked 
Pieter. 

“ Who are you and where are you going ?” 
asked the Boer in reply. 

When the missionary had explained the pur- 
pose of his journey, the Boer invited them in. 
In the main room, whose floor was composed of 
clay and cow-manure stamped into a firm, 
smooth mass, sat the farmer’s stout red-faced 
wife, whom they greeted as “ aunty.” After the 
Boer had introduced his guests to her, he ordered 
her to see to the supper. 

Large dishes of maize mush were placed on 
the heavy table, flanked by platters of beef roast 
and mutton. Seven grown sons, six feet tall, 
broad-shouldered and clownish, came in from 
the fields, and from the kitchen and garden 
came six red-faced daughters. All took their 
places, with folded hands, around the table. 
Four black female servants in red woolen dresses 
entered and stood modestly near the door. All 
stood save the father, mother and the missionary, 


A BOER FAMILY AT HOME 49 

while the old Boer read a psalm from the brass- 
bound Bible. Then the others seated them- 
selves, and supper began. Each had a plate, 
but only the guests and the father and mother 
had knives and forks. The sons whetted their 
pocket knives on their shoes and cut their meat. 
For dessert the black women passed luscious 
oranges, cherries, figs, and grapes. 

Next morning the guests said good-bye with 
friendly wishes, but without thanks, after the 
custom of the hospitable country. 

After a two days’ journey the travelers came 
in sight of the church tower of Botschabelo, 
founded by the missionary Merensky. On the 
very summit of the mountain stood little Fort 
William, which had already afforded protection 
against the hostile chiefs, Secocoeni and Mapoch, 
and round about it clustered the huts of the 
Kafir converts. Farther down the valley was a 
settlement of a thousand inhabitants composed 
of three different tribes, the Basutos, Bakapas, 
and B aped is. 

Botschabelo was the largest of the German 
mission stations in South Africa, and it was a 
great joy to the old missionary to meet here the 
superintendent and his fellow-missionaries, to 


4 


50 


THE BOER BOY 


hear his mother-tongue once more, and to com- 
mune with his brothers in the service of God. 
He had not seen them for years, for his was a 
fiery spirit, and he took from choice the most 
distant and difficult fields for his work. One of 
the brothers who had just returned from Natal 
announced that the political situation between 
the English, the Boers, and the Zulus was very 
insecure. 

“ I hear,’’ said he, “ that the English are fit- 
ting out an expedition against Cetewayo. Now 
that the English have declared sovereignty over 
the Boers they feel in duty bound to protect 
them against the Zulus.” 

“ We will be little affected by this war,” said 
another brother. “ Our trouble comes from the 
East.” 

“ What is wrong there ?” asked the old mis- 
sionary. 

“ A dangerous pair of robbers, with a great 
horde of followers, who hide in the Drakenberg, 
have become so daring that they have recently 
been seen two miles east of us in the great for- 
ests. They were at one time Basuto princes, 
and are known among the Boers as The Snake 
and The Bat, under which names they have 


A BOER FAMILY AT HOME 


51 


become a terror to the neighborhood of Utrecht, 
Wakkerstrom, and Ly den burg. They once 
lived in the Orange Free State, whose Dutch 
settlers finally got possession of their vast lands 
and herds, and enslaved them and their follow- 
ers. They became shepherds for a rich Boer, 
but he so shamefully treated them, their fol- 
lowers and their women and children, that they 
finally shot him, escaped across the Yaal River 
and concealed themselves in the ravines and 
caves of the Drakenberg, whence, with their 
followers, they raid the country; ” 

The old missionary listened attentively, and 
said: “These people have been cruelly treated. 
I will go among them to sow the seed of the 
gospel. The hearts of these robbers have be- 
come hardened through the injustice of the 
Christians, but they will melt in the flame of 
Christian love.” 

Although the brothers remonstrated with him 
on account of his age and the ferocity of the 
robbers, he persisted in his resolution. Pieter 
followed him from the room. “ Take me with 
you,” he said. 

“ No, no !” replied the missionary. “ Our 
ways must separate here. You must return home.” 


52 


THE BOER BOY 


“ Take me with you,” pleaded the boy. “ I 
love you. You need me to take care of you.” 

“ The Lord’s servants do not need the protec- 
tion of weapons,” said the missionary. “ Their 
being unarmed is their strongest protection 
among robbers and murderers.” 

The boy still implored, and, grasping the old 
man’s hand, said : “ It will give me such joy to 
see you soften the hearts of the heathen.” 

The missionary looked at Pieter’s ardent face 
with deep interest. “ I will consider it over 
night,” he said, “and you do the same. In the 
morning your blood will be cooler. Good- 
night !” 


CHAPTER VI 

pieter’s race with lord fitzherbert 

A few days after this, on the evening before 
the day set by the missionary for his departure, 
the missionaries of Botscliabelo and their fami- 
lies had just seated themselves at the supper table 
when the blacks ran in crying excitedly that 
strangers were coming. Running to the door 
they saw riding up the hill, three abreast, a little 
company of twenty-four dragoons in splendid 
scarlet uniforms and white cork helmets. About 
them flocked the blacks, men, women and chil- 
dren, screaming and dancing. 

The young commander drew rein before the 
mission house and asked Pieter Maritz for the 
superintendent. The boy understood English, 
but, astonished at the haughty tone and the 
peculiar accent, he looked at the speaker without 
replying. 


53 


54 


THE BOER BOY 


“ Can’t the bumpkin answer, or doesn’t lie 
want to?” cried the Englishman. “These 
people need to be taught some manners, it 
seems.” 

The young Englishman announced to the 
superintendent, who now came out, that he was 
Lord Adolphus Fitzlierbert, Lieutenant and Com- 
mander of a patrol of Her Majesty’s Dragoons, 
and that he desired quarters for the night at 
Botschabelo. 

When he went into the dining room Pieter 
observed his long pale face, close-cropped black 
hair and white hands, in striking contrast with 
his own brown hands, hard as iron. The 
Englishman was a head taller than he, and 
apparently but a few years older. 

“ We are after a couple of vagabonds,” the 
officer informed the brothers, “ The Snake and 
The Bat, they are called. It would be a whole- 
some lesson to the rest if we caught and hung 
one or the other of these niggers.” 

“ How long have you been in Africa, my 
Lord?” asked the superintendent. 

“Just fourteen days,” he replied. “ Our 
troops were sent over to protect the Transvaal 
Boers ; they are more trouble than they are 


pieter’s race with lord fitzherbert 55 

worth. Now that we rale them, we must protect 
them, or they will be eaten up by the niggers.” 

Pieter sprang up angrily. “ You don’t know 
the Transvaal Boers! They will neither be 
eaten by the niggers nor the English !” 

“One of them, no doubt!” said the English- 
man, scornfully. “ Get out of here, rascal !” 

The old missionary quickly drew the excited 
boy from the room, and, once outside, admonished 
him to be quiet for the sake of the brothers of 
the station. “You do not know how overbear- 
ing are people of rank,” said he. “ But you 
will be brave. To conquer one’s self is the 
greatest deed of the hero.” 

The next morning, when he rode out into the 
courtyard of the fortress to wait for the mis- 
sionary’s wagon, Pieter saw the dragoons drawn 
up ready to depart. When the Lieutenant’s 
eye fell on the boy, he cried : “ That clownish 
Boer can make himself useful to-day. Come 
here, fellow. You can guide us on the way to 
Pretoria.” 

“ If I knew the way I would not guide you,” 
said Pieter, scornfully. 

“I command you to guide us,” cried the 
Lieutenant. 


56 


THE BOER BOY 


“ No one can command me,” replied Pieter. 
“I am a free citizen of the South African 
Republic.” 

“ Indeed !” cried the Lieutenant. “ Is that 
the way they talk down here ? Don’t you 
know that you are committing high treason, 
boy ? There is no such republic. And Her 
Majesty expects obedience from all her subjects.” 

Both the missionary and the superintendent 
tried to persuade the Lieutenant not to press 
the matter. But the young officer had an over- 
weening sense of his own importance and that 
of his commission. The Germans did not want 
to anger him for fear he might prejudice the 
Government of Cape Colony against the Ger- 
man missions. 

Pieter realized this. He sat on his horse 
just within the open gate, knowing that a press- 
ure of his foot against Jager’s side would 
speedily bring him to freedom ; but he did not 
run away. The Englishman had wounded him 
deeply the evening before, but under the morn- 
ing’s blue sky it was all forgotten. He did not 
wish to harm the good brothers, besides he 
might play the English a trick and return to 
the missionary, whom he was determined to 


pieter’s race with lord fitzherbert 57 


accompany. Accordingly lie rode up to tlie 
Lieutenant and offered liis services politely, 
begging pardon for liis words and asking only 
that lie be permitted to go on horseback, and 
not too rapidly, as his was but a poor peasant’s 
horse, worn out with several days’ travel. 

The road to Pretoria was good, but it ran over 
a grassy plain, with no protection from the in- 
tense heat of the sun. Far off to the east a 
long blue line along the horizon indicated the 
position of the great forests. Pieter soon noticed 
that the fine black horse of the Lieutenant was 
the only one which could compare with Jager 
for strength and speed. The Lieutenant in turn 
had observed Jager, and commented on Pieter’s 
skill in riding. “ Do all the Boers ride ?” he 
inquired. 

“ We all ride from youth,” replied Pieter, 
“ though not so well as the Queen’s soldiers.” 

“Have many of the Boers saddle-horses?” 
asked the Lieutenant. 

“ All of them.” 

“ And how many Boers would take the field 
if war broke out with the Zulus or the Bechu- 
anas ?” 

“ If the Zulus made the attack,” replied the 


58 


THE BOER BOY 


boy, “ the Boers near the Zulus would take the 
field. If the Bechuanas make an invasion the 
volunteers of that place are called out.” 

“ But if all the armed Boers came together, 
how many would there be ?” 

“ That I do not know,” answered Pieter, inno- 
cently. “ There are too many of them to count.” 

“Ha! ha!” laughed the Englishman. “If 
there are so many they would not have sub- 
mitted to us.” 

“ Probably there are still more English sol- 
diers,” answered the boy. “ How many men 
has the Queen in Cape Colony and Natal?” 

The Lieutenant looked at the boy suspiciously. 
“From what region have you come? Where 
do your parents live ?” lie asked. 

“ I was born in the North,” replied Pieter. 
“ The community to which I belong does not 
live in a fixed village, but belongs to the Trek 
Boers. We go about, which, in our language, 
is called trekking. When there is no longer 
good pasture for the cattle or the hunting is bad, 
we go in search of a better place.” 

“ Then you are nothing but vagabonds,” said 
the Englishman, scornfully. “ It is high time 
we took you in hand.” 


pieter’s race with lord fitziierp>ert 59 


Pieter’s bronzed face flushed, but be did not 
reply. 

They were now approaching hilly land cov- 
ered with shrubs and traversed by water courses. 
Pieter’s sharp eyes swept over the landscape. 

“ How far are you going to take me with you, 
sir ?” he asked. 

“ We will see later,” replied the Englishman. 

“ I should not like to go clear to Pretoria.” 

“ You will do as you are ordered.” 

“ What a handsome horse you have !” spoke 
the boy. “ Did you bring him with you from 
England ?” 

The lieutenant looked complacently at his 
horse. 

“ He can run much more swiftly than our 
peasant horses,” said Pieter, again. 

“ He is certainly very swift,” replied the Lieu- 
tenant. 

“ Can he jump well?” asked Pieter, inno- 
cently. 

“ Of course,” replied the Englishman. “ Now 
keep quiet. It is considered good manners to 
speak only when you are spoken to.” 

Pieter adjusted his gun and his cartridge belt 
more comfortably and gently pressed his leg 


60 


THE BOER BOY 


against Jager’s side. The liorse lifted his head 
and pricked up his ears. 

“ That would make the journey very tedious, 1 ” 
he exclaimed, with a meaning smile. “ Fare- 
well ; I wish you a happy journey !” 

With these words he suddenly turned his 
horse to the left and started across the field at 
full speed. 

“ Curse the fellow !” cried the Englishman. 
“ Catch him, men ! After him !” 

Looking back, Pieter saw the troop of dra- 
goons coming behind him in broken ranks, the 
Lieutenant in the lead. He heard the young 
officer call to the soldiers not to shoot, as he 
wanted to take the fugitive alive. 

“ Come on !” shouted Pieter, defiantly, and, 
leaning over liis horse’s neck, exclaimed : “ Go 
it, Jager!” 

The rest at Botscliabelo had given Jager re- 
newed strength, and he fled across the field like 
a whirlwind. The road ran past a little stream, 
broadening into a lake at some places. Across 
one of these, perhaps one hundred feet wide, 
Pieter swam his horse, followed by the Lieuten- 
ant and six of his men. Once across, he gal- 
loped along quietly, choosing the roughest 


pieter’s race with lord fitzherbert 61 

ground, intersected by streams and covered 
with shrubs and blocks of stone overgrown 
with cactus. Herds of steinbok leaped from 
the brush before him, and gnus with buffalo- 
like horns and tails like those of horses crossed 
his path. 

Turning without checking Jager in the steady 
gallop into which he had fallen, Pieter saw 
that all his pursuers save the Lieutenant had 
abandoned the chase. The Lieutenant’s fine 
black horse was gaining steadily ; it was but 
twenty feet behind him. 

A word to Jager, and Pieter’s sure-footed 
animal shot forward, swift as an arrow, toward a 
thicket of aloes, euphorbias and acacia detinens. 
The practiced horse slipped through this thicket 
as an eel, and Pieter laughed when he saw the 
Englishman emerge from the bushes, his splen- 
did coat in tatters and with blood and sweat 
streaming down his horse’s sides. 

The angry English officer urged his horse 
forward, and by a supreme effort reached the 
boy. His hand was stretched out to seize him, 
when at a loud cry from his master, Jager 
leaped forward with more powerful strides, 
leaving the black horse again behind. 


62 


THE BOER BOY 


The ground now became more broken, and a 
ravine through which rippled a brook barred 
the way. The slopes were very steep and cov- 
ered with great stones. With the nimbleness 
of a cat, Jager clattered down in an oblique 
line, sprang across the brook and galloped up 
the opposite side. On the height the boy pulled 
up, to give Jager a breath and to watch his pur- 
suer cross the treacherous ravine and stream 
The Englishman was beside himself with rage. 
He urged his weary horse down the steep hill, 
into the brook and then up the rocky incline 
with difficulty. The Englishman was dum- 
founded. He seemed to ride behind a dream 
figure, with fluttering blonde hair and a sun- 
burned face that sometimes looked back to mock 
him. 

Jager was still fresh. Before them now rose 
the dark wall of the forest, wrapped in blue 
mist. The desperate race was now on again. 
Near the edge of the woods, among the high 
grass and bushes, stood a natural bank, like a 
wall. Jager slackened his pace and took the 
leap easily. The black horse shied at the sight 
of the wall ; then, driven by spur thrusts, lifted 
himself splendidly and attempted the leap. But 


pieter's race with lord fitzherbert 63 

it was too much for liis already exhausted 
strength. His feet struck the wall, and plung- 
ing over, he rolled on the ground. Lord 
Adolphus, himself exhausted, tumbled from his 
saddle, struck the ground and lay motionless. 


CHAPTER YII 


PIETER AND FITZHERBERT FALL INTO THE 
HANDS OF “ THE SNAKE ” 

Pieter liad pulled up and was about to return 
to lend assistance to liis hot-tempered pursuer, 
when he suddenly found himself surrounded 
by a troop of ugly-looking Kafirs. They had 
been watching the race from a distance and 
crept up unperceived in the tall grass to inter- 
cept the daring riders. All of them wore the 
martial hair adornment of ostrich and eagle 
feathers. While some were clad in trousers and 
blouses, others wore fur mantles, and some few 
only the tsecha. All were suspiciously well 
armed, some with bows and arrows, battle-axes, 
and assegais ; others with guns and cartridge 
belts. 

Pieter concealed his alarm and awaited de- 
velopments. The blacks rushed up with a shout 
64 


IN THE HANDS OF THE SNAKE 65 

and dragged the Boer boy from liis horse, ap- 
propriating his gun with great delight. Part 
of the band had hastened on to where the 
unconscious Lord Fitzlierbert lay, and quickly 
tore off his weapons and valuables. Seeing that 
he still remained unconscious, the leader of the 
band examined him, and then, with a grunt, 
ordered his companions to make a crude litter, 
on which they placed him. Under the command 
of their leader, an imperious old man in a lion- 
skin mantle, they started off through the forest, 
forcing Pieter to follow on foot between two 
Kafirs. 

The blacks kept up a swift march, as if fear- 
ing pursuit. The journey led under the cathe- 
dral-like arches of the seven-leaved silk-cotton 
tree, the tamarind and the fan palm of the vast 
forest, and lasted two hours. Toward noon they 
came in sight of a little settlement, where in the 
midst of a circle of round huts rose the smoke 
of a rudely constructed fireplace. As they halted, 
men and women came forth to look at the arri- 
vals, and at the call of the leader a white-haired 
Kafir approached the litter. He was a physician, 
and Pieter watched with interest his treatment 
of the wounded young English officer. He 


5 


66 


THE BOER BOY 


washed the blood skilfully from the Lieutenant’s 
forehead and sewed the gaping wound carefully 
with a fine-pointed bone and very thin animal 
tendons. On the wound he laid a plaster of 
chewed herbs and covered the whole with a thin 
piece of leather. Then he laid the unconscious 
form comfortably on the soft moss and crouched 
down near him, his arms wrapped around his 
withered legs, his chin on his knees. 

After Pieter had shared the blacks’ dinner, he 
returned to his post beside the litter and was 
soon rewarded by seeing Lord Fitzherbert open 
his eyes and look about dreamily. When the 
Englishman recognized the boy he frowned 
angrily ; then his glance fell on the Kafir phy- 
sician. Astonished, he tried to rise, but sank 
back with a groan. 

“ What does all this mean ?” he asked. 

While Pieter explained the occurrences of the 
morning the Kafir leader approached. The 
Englishman had seen only slavish blacks since 
his arrival in Africa, and was impressed by the 
imperious manner of the chief. The old man 
stood, with lion skin thrown back, a broad gold 
band flashing on his arm and a white ostrich 
feather waving from his head. Captive though 


IN THE HANDS OF THE SNAKE 


67 


he was, and compelled to lie on the ground, 
Lord Fitzherbert showed the pride of a Briton 
and a man of rank. 

“ Tell these rascals,” he said to Pieter, who 
offered to act as interpreter, “ that if they do 
not take me and my horse back to the place 
where they found us I will have them all 
hanged.” 

“ You forget,” said the hoy, “ that if they 
murder us you can have nobody hanged. We 
are in their power.” 

“ They will not dare kill me,” said the Eng- 
lishman. “ They know very well that the Gov- 
ernor would smoke every black rascal of them 
out of the forest. But,” he added, after a 
moment’s thought, “ you know better than I. 
Tell them they will receive a large sum of 
money if they will take me to Pretoria.” 

The leader replied that another would have 
to decide as to that, and gave orders that the 
journey be continued. Pieter noticed as a good 
omen that his weapons and horse were given in 
charge of one of the fourteen blacks chosen to 
accompany them. 

They camped in the forest; then the march 
continued through the next day, by which time 


THE BOER BOY 


Lord Adolphus had sufficiently recovered to 
walk for a short time beside the litter. Toward 
evening they entered a mountainous district. 
Wild torrents dashed down from the heights 
and hurried through deep valleys. The forest 
trees were lower, and there was much under- 
growth. Higher peaks towered in the distance. 
The Englishman now leaned on the Boer 
boy’s shoulder. He felt drawn to his only 
white companion in captivity, as if they had 
long been friends. The boy’s riding had in- 
spired him with respect, and he was impressed 
by his honest face. 

“ Tell me,” he said, finally, “ what are these 
fellows going to do with us ? Do they roast 
and eat their captives, or will they demand a 
ransom ?” 

“No,” replied the boy, “I think we have 
fallen into the hands of The Snake and The 
Bat, and this must be the Drakenberg, where 
they have their stronghold. But what they will 
do with us I cannot guess.” 

“ Suppose,” said Lord Fitzherbert, “ that we 
attack our guard. They would quickly pierce 
us with their javelins, and that would end it all 
without any unpleasant suspense.” 


m THE hand's of the snake 


69 


Pieter shook liis head. “ I fear your 
fall has affected your mind,” he replied. “ Do 
not think of such madness. All will be well if 
we but trust in God.” 

As the journey continued, the region became 
more and more mountainous. The path now 
and then dropped into a deep valley only to 
ascend a greater height on the opposite side. 
The blacks urged on their captives more swiftly, 
as if anxious to reach a certain point before 
stopping. Observing Pieter’s weariness, they 
indicated that he might ride Jager, two of 
them holding the horse’s reins that he might not 
escape. Fitzherbert had long since been forced 
to return to his litter. 

Night fell gloomily over the mountain passes 
and the roar of a lion occasionally came to their 
ears from the depths of the valley. It seemed 
impossible that the blacks could find their way 
through the darkness, but guided by instinct they 
never once paused in their swift march. Com- 
ing out from a deep ravine where the darkness 
was intense because of high rock walls and over- 
hanging bushes, a landscape bathed in moon- 
light lay spread out before them, with a little 
lake reflecting the moonlight. 


70 


THE BOEE BOY 


The Englishman sat up in his litter and gazed 
on this picture with delighted eyes. His cour- 
ageous mind, despising peril as much as. pru- 
dence, was not cast down by captivity, and he 
enjoyed the beauty of the scene as much as if 
he were taking a pleasure trip through the high- 
lands of his own country. 

The leader of the captors now stopped, and 
while one of the blacks swung a lighted torch in 
a circle three times, the old man gave three 
piercing cries, imitating the wild goose. 

Soon a black spot appeared on the opposite 
side of the lake. It grew larger and was soon 
seen to be a long pointed boat, manned by 
natives. In this the prisoners and their guards 
were taken across the small lake, the horses 
swimming behind. 

The rocks rose sharply from the other shore, 
leaving only a narrow ledge on which to dis- 
embark. Stepping cautiously along this, they 
soon came to an opening in the wall-like rock, 
like a hidden door. Entering they proceeded 
into the mountain a little way, and turning to 
the right there opened before them a large cave, 
brightly lighted by a great fire in the middle of 
the room, about which danced many naked 


IN THE HANDS OF THE SNAKE 


71 


blacks. These, fifty or sixty in number, bad 
just returned from a foray in the mountains, and 
were engaged in slaughtering some captured 
oxen preparatory to a feast. 

Pieter and Lord Fitzlierbert waited near the 
entrance while the leader left them watching 
the scene. 

The crowd of blacks about the fire had 
apparently just returned from a marauding ex- 
pedition, for a meal was being prepared, although 
it was late at night. Perhaps fifty or sixty 
black forms were busy about and near the fire, 
looking in its red light like a crowd of imps. 
This impression was heightened by the work in 
which they were engaged. 

From a part of the great cave that lay in 
shadow, from among a group of lowing oxen 
they led out near the fire a fat animal, threw it 
on the ground on its back, and bound a rope to 
each of its feet. These ropes they drew so that 
the legs were as far apart as possible, and tied 
them with short stakes in the ground, so that 
the ox lay immovable. With one stroke of a 
gleaming knife a black cut the body of the ox 
through the middle without losing more than 
a few drops of blood. Then, with the help of 


72 


THE BOER BOY 


another man, the carcass was cleaned; the men 
then stirred the blood still flowing in the cavity 
of the body with sticks that it might not co- 
agulate, and waited until the animal, whose heart 
remained long in motion, should fully die. The 
Kafirs stood about attentively and did not lift 
their eyes from the moving organs. 

The leader presently returned and conducted 
them past the fire into the back of the cave 
room. Here sat a circle of men of rank, wear- 
ing mantles of tiger and panther skins and gold 
and copper arm and neck bands. They were of 
different colors and features, some brownish red, 
others very black, some having the aquiline 
nose of the Kafir, others the flattened nose of 
the Hottentot. 

On a couch of lion skin lay the chief, a man 
of low stature, but of massive build. His skin 
was dark brown, his hair mixed with gray, his 
black eyes restless and penetrating. He wore a 
white wool tunic and a lion-skin mantle. Gold 
bands shone on his arms, and a chain of lion’s 
teeth with gold links hung about his neck. In 
his belt of embroidered leather was thrust a 
cutlass. 

As the prisoners approached, the chief arose 


IN THE HANDS OF THE SNAKE 


73 


and looked at them scornfully. Shaking his 
fists until the golden arm bands clattered, he 
cried in Dutch : “ Sons of the faithless white 
men, you are in the power of him you call 
‘ The Snake !’ Prepare for death !” 

The prisoners held their heads erect and 
looked boldly into the chief's sparkling eyes. 
Nothing could have induced them to show any 
sign of fear. The chief became still more 
angry, and turned to harangue his men. 

“ See what dangerous people these white men 
are !” he said. “ They are but boys, yet they 
bear themselves like experienced warriors. 
Faithless in peace, greedy and overbearing, 
obstinate in battle, persistent and cruel, these 
are the characteristics of the enemy which 
Morimo, to punish us, has brought across the 
sea. Our tribes melt before them as the fat of 
oxen before the fire, and the brave men who will 
not bear their yoke must conceal themselves in 
caves and on the mountains. Show them no 
mercy ! Revenge is far sweeter than any 
ransom !” 

A murmur of assent arose from the circle. 
“ Take them away !” he commanded. “ To- 
morrow I will pronounce their sentence." 


74 


THE BOER BOY 


The cell-like corner of the great cave into 
which they were led was lighted by a torch 
brought by their jailers, who also brought furs 
for a couch and a pot of bad-smelling broth 
and cooked meat, which they ate together. 
Fatigue soon sent both prisoners fast asleejD on 
their fur couches. 

When they awoke the cell was dimly lighted, 
and their jailers lay asleep across the threshold. 
Presently, in the great cave outside, there arose 
the sound of voices and the clang of weapons. 
Soon a troop of armed men appeared, led by 
The Snake. At his side stood a man whom 
the prisoners had not seen before, but whom, 
from his appearance, must be The Snake’s 
brother, known as The Bat. He was larger, 
more strongly built, and wore a cap and mantle 
of gray monkey skin. 

The Snake addressed his prisoners : “ This is 
the day on which you die.” 


CHAPTER VIII 


THE DEATH SENTENCE 

Turning to his soldiers, The Snake continued: 

“ My warriors, will it please you to give them a 
spear-throw to their advantage, and let them try 
to run away ? Then you may shoot after them. 
That will give you a fine chase and rejoice the 
hearts of my brave heroes. ,, 

A loud exulting cry answered this speech ; 
spear and shield were swung together, and hun- 
dreds of cruel eyes were fixed on the prisoners as 
the chief signaled them to rise and run forward. 

The Englishman was deathly pale, but he • 
smiled scornfully. “ They may kill me,” he 
said, “ but I shall not run. I shall not stir a 
step from this place.” And he crossed his arms 
defiantly over his breast, closed his eyes and lay 
down on the grass. Pieter stood erect, and 
murmured a prayer his mother had taught him. 

75 


76 


THE BOER BOY 


“ Run, you fellows, run !” cried the chief, 
furiously. “ Run, or I will goad you with spear 
points !” 

Just as several of the blacks approached them 
with assagais The Bat touched his brother’s arm 
and pointed to the edge of the forest. The 
chief gave a cry of surprise, echoed by the 
blacks, and Pieter following the direction of their 
eyes was filled at once with surprise and joy. 
For there he saw a wagon drawn by a long train 
of oxen, driven by three black men. In front 
of the train rode a man with a long white beard, 
who could be no other than the old missionary. 

Never before had a wagon visited this region, 
for it was known far and wide and avoided as a 
rendezvous of the robbers. The astonished 
blacks, forgetful of their prisoners, stood mo- 
tionless watching its approach. 

The wagon came nearer and nearer ; the old 
man dismounted and approached the chiefs, who 
stood leaning on their guns in expectant silence. 
Solemnly raising his hands he said in Dutch : 
“ The blessing of God be upon you, strange 
people! I have come hither in the name of the 
Creator of all things to talk with the great 
princes, The Snake and The Bat. You seem 


THE DEATH SENTENCE 


77 


to be princes in these mountains ; be kind to the 
messenger of God and show him the way to the 
renowned men whom I have named to you.” 

“ The Snake and The Bat stand before you,” 
replied the chief. “ What do you want of them, 
white-bearded man ?” 

“ I come to you in the name of the Prince of 
Heaven,” replied the missionary, “ to inform you 
of His will.” 

The Snake turned, laughing, to his brother 
and his warriors. “ This is one of the men the 
whites call missionaries,” he said. “ So long as 
they are few in number and do not dare to 
measure their weapons with us, they talk of a 
Prince of Heaven, who they say wishes men to 
live in peace with one another. But as soon as 
there are enough of them to drive the black 
man from his hunting grounds, they talk no 
more of the Invisible Prince.” 

While he spoke Lord Fitzherbert and Pieter 
had approached the missionary, who looked 
at them astonished. 

“ Look !” cried the chief. “ You will soon 
learn the use of the Invisible Prince. This old 
man will inform us that His will is that we shall 
spare our prisoners. But I say to you, old man, 


78 


THE BOER BOY 


you have come in an evil liour. Look about 
you at the corpses of my men that strew the 
grass, fallen by the bullets of your brothers. 
You, too, shall die. You shall share the race 
with these beardless youths. All three of you 
shall die, and we will eat your oxen/’ 

Stormy applause sounded among the blacks, 
and the thought of the ox roast set them danc- 
ing with joy. But the missionary raised his 
voice again, and this time he spoke in the 
Bechuana language, that all might understand. 
“Why do I come among the mountains ?” he 
asked. “ Do I need corn or meat ? Could I 
not live many months on my oxen? You see 
that I desire nothing from you. I came to 
bring you something, something most precious.” 

“Listen not to this traitor and liar!” cried 
The Snake ; “ he wishes to sj^y about our 
dwellings and inform the Boers where to at- 
tack us. If we allow him to return home again 
we shall soon see them coming. Follow me, 
friends. Kill the whites and let us devour their 
oxen !” 

The obedient crowd echoed the cry, thought- 
lessly led from one desire to another. The 
whites seemed to be lost, when suddenly The 


THE DEATH SENTENCE 


79 


Bat gave a piercing cry, and with a gesture of 
terror pointed to the missionary. 

“ Morimo !” lie cried, warningly. “ Morimo !” 

The crowd of raging, excited men stopped 
suddenly and followed the pointing finger of 
the chief. Their guns and spears fell from their 
hands, and they stood as if petrified, while many 
sank to the ground and raised their hands in 
worship. Awed and angry stood The Snake. 

“ Morimo !” echoed through the crowd. 

On the missionary’s white hair sat a strange 
kind of beetle, about two or three inches long, 
with green back flecked with white and red, 
yellow head and shimmering, transparent wings. 
It was the sacred beetle which the South African 
people worship, some as the messenger of the 
divinity, others as the divinity itself. The 
places on which it sits are consecrated to it, the 
person on whom it alights is considered fortu- 
nate ; but if the insect or person or even the 
animal on which it rests are injured, it signifies 
the greatest misfortune. “ We are saved !” cried 
Pieter, and sank on his knees, thanking God. 

The excited blacks formed a circle about the 
missionary, shouting a greeting to the little in- 
sect. “ Welcome, welcome !” they cried. “ Give 


80 


THE BOER BOY 


us much honey! Provide plenty of pasture for 
our cattle and cause them to give us much milk ! 
Let us steal fat oxen, and fill our pots with meat 
and fat ! Receive our greeting, Morimo ! Re- 
ceive our welcome !” 

Thus they cried and danced, swung their 
spears and shields, struck their weapons to- 
gether, becoming every moment more and more 
intoxicated with joy. Some ran up to the mis- 
sionary’s wagon, unhitched the two foremost 
oxen and killed them, in order to sacrifice them 
to Morimo and eat the meat in his honor. 
Others sought an herb, called buchu, rubbed it 
to powder in their hands, and sprinkled the 
missionary, the insect, themselves, and the 
slaughtered cattle with it. A fire was kindled, 
and a general feast followed. 

The Snake watched the whole proceeding 
with a scornful smile. The whites could easily 
perceive that he pretended to join in the gen- 
eral outcry only from policy, and that he 
thought differently from his people, but did 
not dare to oppose the common superstition. 

At nightfall he gave the signal for departure. 
After an hour’s journey the two bands separated, 
The Snake going to his mountain fastness with 



THE SACRED BEETLE ALIGHTED ON THE MISSIONARY’S HEAD 















































































































































- 









* - 


























































THE DEATH SENTENCE 


81 


his warriors, and The Bat turning into a valley 
at the left. The white men were ordered to 
accompany The Bat. 

The Bat’s village was situated on a high 
plateau and consisted of several hundred huts, 
in which lived a mixed population recruited 
from homeless and discontented natives of dif- 
ferent tribes, who were all intent on the one 
purpose of fighting the Boers and living hap- 
pily by robbing instead of toiling wearily in the 
fields and caring for cattle. The huts were 
round and constructed of rough woodwork and 
clay. They had no windows nor chimneys, 
and the roof, which was cone-shaped, extended 
beyond the walls and formed a covered walk 
about the hut. The yard was surrounded by a 
thorn hedge. The cooking was done in a 
sunken fireplace before the door. 

A hut was assigned to the missionary and his 
friends, and the wagon was left outside the vil- 
lage because it was too wide to bring into the 
narrow alleys between the huts. 

The missionary’s hut was provided with the 
simple native cooking apparatus, a wooden mor- 
tar fashioned from a hollow tree trunk, a hand- 
mill made of a smooth, hollow stone, wooden 


6 


82 


THE BOER BOY 


dishes with decorated edges, earthen cooking 
vessels with covers, urn-shaped water casks, little 
calabashes adorned with spiral lines, and spoons 
artistically cut from wood and ivory, their han- 
dles representing an elephant, a giraffe, or a 
lion. Elevated places on the floor covered with 
furs served for seats. 

Every evening the missionary talked to the 
people, who collected in an open jilace before 
his hut, telling them stories into which he wove 
some lesson. He soon noticed with delight that 
The Snake began to come down from his cave 
at this time and take his place in the audience. 
His attitude was sullen, however, and whenever 
the missionary talked of Christian love or of 
immortality the chief laughed scornfully, and 
sometimes spoke, ridiculing and insulting the 
teacher. Yet the missionary believed that he 
would be able to convert him. 

He was strengthened in this belief by the fact 
that when an attack was made on his life one 
night and he complained to The Snake, the 
chief became angry and would have slain the 
guilty ones had not the missionary begged him to 
spare them. It was but a few days after this that 
The Snake approached the old man’s hut, 


THE DEATH SENTENCE 


83 


deeply troubled. He confessed to the mission- 
ary that he had a dream which could mean 
only that he must become a good man and a 
Christian, and he was troubled because, if he 
did so, he would be despised and degraded by 
his warriors. 

After this conversation he did not appear 
again for a week. The white men learned in 
the meantime that a Piclio was to be held on 
the kliotla, the open space before the village. 

On the day appointed a great crowd of warriors 
marched to the khotla with strange leaps and 
high-swung weapons. All the different divis- 
ions of the great host of robbers who dwelt 
scattered about the mountains assembled and 
squatted in a circle about a great space in the 
middle, placing their shields before them so that 
they formed a closed wall. All sang a song, 
and then The Snake, as the greatest among 
them, gave a dance, accompanying the music 
with solemn steps and leaps. Then another 
leader made a speech, introduced with a yell, 
thrice repeated. 

This speech contained a severe arraignment 
of the two chiefs, The Snake and The Bat. He 
said that the chiefs were neglectful of the wel- 


84 


THE BOER BOY 


fare of the people. Especially did he blame 
The Snake, who instead of holding councils with 
his warriors, sat with the whites, gossiping like 
women. They no longer led marauding expedi- 
tions ; they grew fat, and that was a bad sign, 
indicating neglect of the use of weapons. Two 
other speakers made similar complaints. The 
supply of cattle was becoming smaller, the re- 
spect for the troop declining, the warriors conse- 
quently unhappy. In conclusion, a fourth 
speaker, with the general approval of the 
assembly, challenged The Snake to give back 
the young Englishman to his countrymen for a 
ransom, to kill the Boer boy, to send away the 
missionary, and then to undertake a great expe- 
dition against the Boers to re-establish their 
pristine glory. 

Contrary to custom, The Snake made no 
reply, but sat with bowed head as if the affair 
was nothing to him. His brother spoke to him 
reproachfully. 

“ Why do you not speak ?” asked The Bat. 
“ Do you know nothing to say ? Must I speak 
for you ?” 

The chief rose slowly, supporting himself on 
his battle-ax, and looked sadly over the assembly. 


THE DEATH SENTENCE 


85 


“ There was a time,” lie began, “ when a chief 
dwelt in distant valleys with his brothers and 
sisters, in the fields which had been his fathers’, 
and round about were the meadows covered 
with his cattle. He was happy and rich. But 
Morimo became angry with him and let the 
white men come into his land. He lost every- 
thing through them — his cattle, his pastures, 
his fields. He swore that he would never for- 
give the whites, and went into the mountains. 
There he assembled brave men about him and 
waged war against the Boers. Again he was 
rich and strong, but he was not happy. For in 
his heart that Invisible Being of whom the 
white men know, tormented him and made him 
unhappy. It whispered to him that the slain 
men and orphaned children despised him and 
would give him no peace if they met him after 
death in that place above the earth where the 
dead live again. Now this Invisible Being has 
become so strong that he benumbs him, and the 
sight of his warriors and of the fat cattle is dis- 
agreeable to him. He no longer wishes to go 
about on the plain with his weapons, warring 
against the white men. Therefore, farewell, 
warlike weapons and ornaments of the chief! 


86 


THE BOER BOY 


The Snake will no longer wear you ; he will 
live in concealment and pray God to be gracious 
to his soul !” 

With these words the chief threw down the 
battle-ax and gun, and stripped the golden rings 
from his arms and the warriors’ feathers from 
his head. 

For an instant deep silence reigned in the as- 
tonished assembly, followed by a loud cry and 
scornful laughs. Several of the warriors seized 
their spears as if they would strike down the 
chief, who in their eyes had made so lamentable 
a spectacle of himself. 

But in a moment the behavior of the Picho 
changed and silence again reigned. Two dark, 
supple forms stepped into the circle, and 
Pieter recognized in them the embassadors of 
the Zulu king, Humbati and Molihabantschi. 
His blood chilled. What new and terrible peril 
did these arrivals portend to him ? 


CHAPTER IX 


CETEWAYO, THE ZULU KING, GREETS THE 
WHITE TRAVELERS 

In tlie respectful silence that fell upon the 
Piclio the missionary recognized the importance 
of the two men whom he had saved from death, 
and found therein the confirmation of a suspi- 
cion which he had recently begun to cherish, 
namely, that the power of The Snake did not 
rest on his strength alone, but that he enjoyed 
the support of the powerful prince who was 
feared in all South Africa. In this supposition 
he was strengthened by the events that followed. 

Humbati and Molihabantschi who were 
greeted on all sides witli deep inclinations, pro- 
posed that the crowd of warriors remain in the 
kliotla for a feast, while the chiefs withdrew for 
a secret council. This being agreed to, the 
chiefs returned to the courtyard of The Bat’s 

87 


88 


THE BOER BOY 


hut, where they remained for a long time in 
secret session. 

To the white men, who had withdrawn to 
their hut to talk over the effect of these happen- 
ings on their future, there presently appeared 
Humbati, who bowed politely and seated himself 
near the missionary. 

“ My father,” he said, humbly, “ you were our 
protector. If your hand had not protected us, 
Humbati and Molihabantsclii would be dead 
men. We are your servants ; we belong to you. 
But a few days’ journey from here dwells great 
Cetewayo. He will know how to thank my 
father who has shown us this kindness, for he is 
rich and powerful. My father will have the 
kindness to accompany us to the king.” 

“It is not possible,” said the missionary. 
“ The journey is too long. Besides, I must 
continue my labors here.” 

“ My father is very wise,” replied the Zulu, 
“ and Humbati has not a ready tongue with 
which to answer his arguments. But my father 
must have pity on the embassadors of Cetewayo. 
The king will be angry when we return alone; 
he will not believe that we invited the white 
man to his court. Before the sun sets on the 


CETEWAYO, THE ZULU KING 89 

day when we appear before him our heads will 
fall. Therefore, if my father really loves us, 
he must accompany us.” 

“ What will become of my companions?” 
asked the missionary. 

The Zulu did not hesitate for an instant. 
“ They would go with us in any case,” said he. 

He fixed his eyes on the young j:>eople. “ If 
they will give me their word not to escape,” he 
said, in broken English, “I will let them have 
their horses and weapons. It is painful for a 
soldier to go unarmed.” 

“ As God will !” cried the missionary. “ I will 
go with you.” 

Any change was welcome to the young men, 
weary with the eight-weeks’ stay in the Kafir 
village. They were rejoiced to see their horses 
again. Pieter ran up to Jager with a cry of 
joy, embraced him and pressed his face to the 
horse’s neck. Jager, as well, rejoiced at the 
meeting, rubbed his head on the boy’s shoulder, 
whinnied, and pawed the ground. The weapons 
were restored in good condition, and Lord Fitz- 
herbert received his valuables. He wrote some 
words on a piece of paper, stuck it in the gold 
cigarette case and handed it to The Bat. 


90 


THE BOER BOY 


“ Take tliis for a kee])sake, you nigger 
robber/’ he said, “and if ever any of my 
countrymen wish to hang you to a tree as a well- 
deserved reward for your deeds, show them this 
recommendation from me. For you have treated 
me, all in all, better than any robber in Europe 
would have done.” 

As he spoke in English, which The Bat did 
not understand, the chief grunted with satisfac- 
tion as he took the beautiful case. 

When the wagon was ready for the journey 
twelve warriors from The Bat’s band were 
chosen for an escort, and The Snake also ap- 
peared with twenty of his most faithful follow- 
ers, who wished also to become Christians. He 
wished to accompany the missionary, that he 
might learn more of the new religion. 

The road ran gradually to the south, and they 
passed through great forests and crossed several 
rivers with much difficulty. Severe rainstorms 
hindered their progress for several days, but at 
last the caravan approached the neighborhood 
of Ulundi, the capital city of Cetewayo. Hum- 
bati now left them and went in advance to 
announce their coming. As a stream obstructed 
the direct route to the city, Molihabantschi 


CETEWAYO, THE ZULU KING 


91 


suggested that the wagon make a detour under 
the care of The Snake, while they hurried on 
in order not to disappoint the king, who was 
expecting their arrival. The missionary agreed, 
and they crossed the stream, and after a few 
hours’ ride came in sight of the wide valley, 
surrounded by hills and mountains, in which 
lay Ulundi. From afar they saw several dark 
circles lying near one another like garlands on 
the grass. 

These they learned were the military kraals, 
garrison of the king’s army. 

“That circle is Umlambongwemja, the kraal 
of the dead king, Panda; the next is Quikazi, 
the third is Undabakaombi, and the fourth is 
Ulundi, where dwells the great elephant,” ex- 
plai ned Mol ihaban tsch i. 

From their horses they could see over the 
low walls that the city consisted of a number of 
circles, formed of huts, one within the other, a 
wide-open space in the center. 

When they reached the innermost circle, and 
stood within the great open space, they looked 
at each other in surprise. Nothing met their 
eyes but shields, spear-points, warrior feathers. 
There were dense ranks of men — ten thousand, 


92 


THE BOER BOY 


they calculated — apparently divided into regi- 
ments, designated by color, for here there were 
blue shields and feathers, there black, there 
white, there red, there yellow, and again, red 
and white stripes laid diagonally across the 
shield. 

At a sound of command the thousand war- 
riors with red shields, who had formed the 
entrance- way, moved in well-ordered ranks be- 
hind the guests, shutting off retreat. The 
horses were then taken by the courtiers, and 
the death-like silence that reigned in the palace 
was broken by the war song. It rolled like 
thunder, with a hollow, tremulous sound, caused 
by the warriors holding their shields before 
their mouths and roaring into them with the 
full power of their lungs. Again this noise was 
interrupted by a music that seemed as if it might 
come from the lower regions. It imitated groans 
of the dying on the battlefield, mingled with 
the shrill, hissing sounds of exultation of the 
victors. 

The song ceased and silence again reigned. 

The white men looked about in wonder. The 
ranks of warriors parted and the monarch ap- 
peared. 


CETEWAYO, THE ZULU KING 93 

The king stepped out into the middle of the 
circle and motioned the strangers to come for- 
ward. He had evidently been instructed in the 
English manner of greeting, for he shook hands 
heartily, but so powerfully that they felt as if 
their arms had been seized by a vise. He was 
very tall and stout, his mouth and chin covered 
with a thin beard, a feature that they learned 
later distinguished the Zulus from the other 
South African races. He carried no weapons, 
but he held in his hand an ivory scepter, orna- 
mented with rings of gold. In his short, curled 
hair were thrust three ostrich feathers and a 
golden arrow, and a magnificent strand of real 
pearls hung about his neck. He also wore pearl 
earrings and two gold rings on his left hand. 

After having shaken hands with the whites, 
he took the missionary's arm familiarly. “ The 
land lies before you," he said. “ You have 
come to your son. Rest where it pi eases you." 

He then invited the white men to be seated, 
crouched down himself, and ordered the servants 
who had followed him to set down their baskets 
on the finely woven mats before him and his 
guests. 

When he squatted down a loud cry burst 


94 


THE BOER BOY 


from the ranks of the warriors. “ The great 
king seats himself. The mighty king of heaven 
will eat ! The strong elephant has the grace to 
sit down !” 

Humbati came forth from the ranks and 
crouched down at the right hand of the king. 
He did not greet his acquaintances, but looked 
down modestly, seeming to wait for the mon- 
arch's nod. Molihabantschi and the other 
courtiers conducted themselves in the same way. 

The king said nothing more during the meal. 
In the pretty woven baskets were oranges, 
melons, pomegranates and other fruits, and all 
kinds of pastry. Milk and honey were also 
served. Twelve Indunas sat with them. They 
were much simpler in their attire than the war- 
riors, but wore more ornaments than the king. 
All bore shields and stabbing assagais. It was 
a warriors' court, and nothing was to be seen of 
the women. 

When the king arose and dismissed his guests 
with a gesture, the deathlike stillness was again 
broken by the warriors' cry, led by Humbati : 
“Pezulu! Pezulu! The king arises! The 
mighty elephant has dined !" 

Humbati conducted the white men to their 


CETEWAYO, THE ZULU KING 


95 


dwellings — five liuts surrounded by a Ledge, 
well-furnished and provided witli servants. 
TLey realized, Lowever, tliat tLey were to be 
surrounded entirely by Zulus. Humbati here 
informed them tliat only consideration Lad in- 
duced tLe king to spare TLe Snake's life, and 
tliat Le Lad been ordered to remain at a remote 
mission station and not to show Lis face at 
Ulundi. 

TLe following day tlie king paid tLe mission- 
ary a visit, accompanied by Humbati and Moli- 
babantschi and two other Indunas. 

Embracing the missionary and laying Lis 
right Land on Lis own breast, lie said : “ Panda ! 
I call you Panda, for you are my father. You 
have made my heart as white as milk. Milk is 
to-day not white; my heart is white. I cannot 
cease wondering over the love of a stranger. 
You Lave never seen me, and yet you love me ! 
You dressed me when I was naked, you fed me 
when I was hungry, and you bore me in your 
bosom. This arm protected me from my 
enemies." 

TLe missionary perceived that Cetewayo 
alluded to the protection Le Lad given the em- 
bassadors, and saw that the cunning Humbati, 


06 


THE BOER BOY 


in order to give liimself greater importance, had 
placed the white guest in a dazzling light. 

“ These are great men,” continued the king, 
pointing to the embassadors. “ Humbati is my 
right hand. When I sent these away in order 
to see the land of the white men I sent away my 
eyes, my ears, my mouth. When they would 
have been killed you covered them with your 
shield. That have you done for me, for Cete- 
wayo, the son of Panda.” 

The missionary saw that, while the king was 
grateful, it was also flattering to him to think 
that his name was so mighty and so widely 
known that it was feared even in the remote 
north. A low murmur arose from the lips of 
the courtiers when he ceased to speak : “ Pezulu ! 
The king of heaven, the king of kings ! The 
people know his power, the nations fear him.” 

The king drew the missionary aside confi- 
dentially, where no one could hear them. 

“ My father is very wise,” he said, “ and also 
very good. You tell me the truth and do not 
flatter ; therefore I trust you. Tell me, have 
the English all come over into Cape Colony and 
Natal, or have some of them remained behind 
in their own home ?” 


CETEWAYO, THE ZULU KING ( J7 

It was evident that Cetewayo wished to learn 
whether the English troops would be reinforced, 
and in his ignorance held it possible that the 
English might all be in Africa. According to 
this he would regulate his policy. 

“ O King,” said the missionary, “ the power 
of the English is very great. They rule not 
only their own island, but have conquered king- 
doms all over the earth. For every subject you 
have they have a thousand.” 

The king’s face grew gloomy. “ You have 
not seen a fourth part of Cetewayo’s warriors,” 
he said. “They are scattered all over the 
country. The English are much weaker in 
number.” 

“ But consider,” said the missionary, “ the 
English have guns. And again, England never 
lets herself be defeated. She dares not show 
her conquered kingdoms that she can be beaten, 
so she continues to send new soldiers until she 
conquers. I advise you, O King, if possible, to 
keep peace with the English.” 

This was a daring speech, but Cetewayo did 
not become angry. 

“ You speak the truth, ” he said. “ Cetewayo 
thinks as you do. And my father may help 
7 


98 


THE BOER BOY 


him. He may whisper to the young English 
Inchina that I will honor him as a chief, and 
dismiss him to his home that he may take them 
my message. If the English wish to gain lands 
and cattle they should make war against the 
Boers. Cetewayo will help them, and we will 
divide the Boers’ country betwen us.” 

“ The English do not want to take away the 
Boers’ land and cattle,” replied the missionary. 
“They only want to make them acknowledge 
the sovereignty of their queen. They do not 
want you to devastate the country ; they want 
to make of it a rich country, where Christianity 
is preached. I do not believe they will listen to 
your proposal.” 

Cetewayo shook his head. “ My father is 
very wise, but he does not know the English. 
Have they not once made war against the Boers 
with Cetewayo’s aid? They would take all 
the land in Africa for themselves. Cetewayo 
cannot live in peace with the white men. Either 
lie must kill them, or they him. 

“ Not all the white people are bad,” lie con- 
tinued, “You are good ; you love me. Talk to 
the English Induna, and if my wish succeeds 
I will make you rich and great,” and before the 


CETEWAYO, THE ZULU KING 99 

missionary could reply he had motioned to his 
attendants and left the hut. 

The missionary hastened to communicate the 
good news to Lord Fitzlierbert. “ I have told 
the king,” he said, “ that I thought his propo- 
sition would have no result, hut I keep my 
promise to offer you this embassy.” 

“ That is splendid,” cried Lord Fitzlierbert, 
flushing with joy. “ I will see my regiment 
again ! I have no influence with the Governor 
for I am only an insignificant lieutenant, but 
really Cetewayo’s proposition is not so bad. 
But he comes too late, for he no longer counts in 
political affairs. I must confess, however, that 
the sight of his army fills me with respect. 
How well they are drilled ! How powerful they 
are !” 

“ It is very disagreeable for me to become 
entangled in political affairs,” said the mis- 
sionary. “ I devoutly hope that there will be no 
war. Perhaps, if God will, I may gain power 
over Cetewayo’s mind and bring him to cease 
considering the shedding of blood as a hero’s 
deed.” 

“ Never !” said the Englishman. “ That is 
his only way of asserting his mastery. I have 




100 


THE BOEE BOY 


heard the situation discussed in England by 
people who know. So let me advise you, my 
dear friend. You are not safe here ; use your 
influence to induce the king to let you go. The 
Government of Cape Colony is determined to 
settle with the Zulus. Many troops have already 
landed, and more are coming. By the end of 
the year our troops will march into this country 
and make an end of the Zulu power. Your 
life will be imperiled. Escape as soon as pos- 
sible.” 

“ I thank you for your interest, my lord,” re- 
plied the missionary, “ but let me advise you to 
give the Governor some information on many 
things which he does not know. I think the 
English underestimate the power of Cetewayo 
and the strength of the Boers. I wish you 
would exert your influence for peace. Do not 
attack the Zulus. Leave it to Christianity to 
break this wild power.” 

“ I will do what I can,” said the English- 
man. “But who am I ? The Governor will not 
trouble himself about my advice. I am a 
soldier and have only to obey. Believe me, 
Cetewayo is lost !” 


CHAPTER X 


ROYAL MANOEUVRES AND HUNTING 

Cetewayo’s plan for honoring the English 
lord as a chief mainly consisted in displaying 
his own power. Soon after his conversation 
with the missionary he invited his guests to 
accompany him to the north to witness the 
manoeuvres which were to be held there in Lord 
Fitzherbert’s honor. 

After a day’s march they reached a plain 
where a large number of men were already 
assembled. The next morning twenty thousand 
warriors were led out for manoeuvres. Some of 
the regiments numbered only five hundred, 
others were two thousand strong. In each regi- 
ment the warriors were the same age, the 
youngest regiment consisting of youths of 
fifteen or sixteen years. They greeted the 
monarch as he came forth to inspect them 
with deafening songs, during which he took his 

101 


102 


THE BOEB BOY 


place on a hill, with the white men, the mission- 
ary acting as interpreter between him and Lord 
Fitzherbert. 

Cetewayo informed the Englishman that every 
able-bodied man in his country must serve. 
Even the boys learned to march, throw the 
spear and bear the heavy shield. No one was 
allowed to marry without permission, and this 
permission was not given to individuals, but to 
entire regiments, in reward for some service, so 
that the title “ married man” was regarded as a 
distinction. 

The king, after breakfast, told Lord Fitzher- 
bert that he thought of having an elephant 
hunt in his honor. 

This announcement greatly delighted Lord 
Fitzherbert and Pieter, for elephants had be- 
come so scarce in South Africa that the Boer 
boy had never seen one taken. Their delight 
was tempered, however, by regret that they 
could not take part in the hunt except as spec- 
tators, as the Englishman was without weapons 
except his sword, and Pieter could not count on 
piercing the elephant’s thick skin with a gun 
of such small calibre as his. Both were curious 
to see how the king would direct the chase. 


ROYAL MANOEUVRES AND HUNTING 103 


Tlieir steps were now turned toward the 
banks of the Black Umvolosi. They climbed 
high mountains and traversed deep valleys, and 
after a long day’s march reached the river, just 
at nightfall. The moon was shining, and occa- 
sionally its light broke through the clefts in the 
high, rocky bluffs, and shone on the surface of 
the water, and again the hunters marched over 
perilous paths in utter darkness. The court 
master of the chase, who had gone in advance 
with a retinue, presently returned with the in- 
formation that the elephants were near by. 

Soon there was a stir in the long train, and all 
stopped. The king who had followed the master 
of the chase, commanded the Blue Shields to 
turn aside and approach- the river in a wide 
circuit. The king motioned to the white men 
to look before them, and they saw at some dis- 
tance dark forms in and near the water. They 
could be seen distinctly, and their size left no 
doubt as to their being elephants. Down to the 
place where they bathed and drank ran a little 
valley, and thither the king had sent the Blue 
Shields to cut off their retreat. The king ad- 
vanced slowly to give the Blue Shields time to 
get to the place ; when he came so near that 


104 


THE BOER BOY 


liis party could count the elephants and see their 
tusks and trunks, he mounted a rock at one side, 
from which he could overlook the valley, evi- 
dently not intending to take part in the hunt him- 
self. He invited the missionary, the Englishman 
and a company of Indunas to join him there. 

Pieter attached himself to the master of the 
chase, rejoiced that he could accompany the 
hunters. Hiding behind a willow bush he soon 
saw the powerful animals closely. There were 
ten large elephants and three young ones. The 
great animals paddled about in the shallow 
water, sprinkling their hides and enjoying their 
bath to the utmost. The leader of the herd, 
an immense animal, stood in the middle of the 
river. Occasionally he lifted his head and 
listened, showing some uneasiness. 

The Boer boy, not daring to show himself, 
remained hiding in a clump of willows two hun- 
dred feet from the nearest elephant. He looked 
over a high curved bough, and, when he lay 
flat on the ground, was entirely buried in green 
and in shadow. He held his gun before him, 
with its barrel on the branch so that it might be 
ready for instant use, and involuntarily he aimed 
it at the eye of the largest elephant. 


ROYAL MANOEUVRES AND HUNTING 105 

At a trumpet-like sound from the leader of 
the herd the elephants suddenly became still. 
The leader went to the bank, lifted his trunk 
and sniffed the air, lifting his ears to catch every 
sound. At his warning call the other animals 
began to move after him clumsily. At that in- 
stant forty warriors, under the leadership of the 
master of the chase, sprang from the bushes 
and ran toward the elephants. 

Half the hunters attacked the giant leader 
of the herd. Two stood before him, and then 
ran ahead to entice him to pursuit. The others 
ran at his side. He paid no attention to them, 
however, but giving another roar and assem- 
bling all the other animals about him, with the 
young ones in the middle, swung his trunk in 
the air, and with ears flying out, ran into the 
valley, the other elejihants with him, crushing 
trees and bushes under their heavy feet. 

From the valley arose the piercing cry of the 
Blue Shields, followed by the trumpeting of 
the elephants and cries of pain from Zulus 
who had been attacked by them. Pieter noticed 
with surprise that the leader did not seem to 
think so much of flight as of protecting his com- 
panions and the young, about whom four of the 


106 


THE BOER BOY 


other animals pressed themselves closely. So 
led, they advanced toward the place where 
Pieter lay concealed, evidently wishing, since 
barred from the valley, to run along the river. 

The master of the chase interposed to stop 
this. His athletic naked form, followed by his 
crowd of hunters, dashed into the path, spear 
in hand. With one swerve of his trunk the 
elephant seized the agile hunter by his crown of 
hair, swung him high in the air, threw him on 
the ground, and, in an instant, crushed him to 
a bloody pulp. Then, feeling his feet pricked 
by spears, he turned savagely, seized one of the 
hunters at his side, threw him down and pierced 
his breast with his tusks. But the agile hunt- 
ers, undismayed, cut the tendons of his feet 
with their broad spear-points, so that he sank 
groaning to the ground in a pool of blood. 

Now Pieter saw a touching scene. The other 
animals, although surrounded by the hunters, 
pressed up to the fallen beast and sought to help 
him up with their trunks, at the same time 
making sorrowful sounds, while he threw his 
trunk about a young one, as though he would 
protect it from the weapons of the enemy. 

Forth from the valley broke the howling Blue 


ROYAL MANOEUVRES AND HUNTING 107 

Shields, the naked black forms swarming thick 
as flies. They attacked the animals from all 
sides, hundreds of assagais whistled through the 
air, and pierced the great bodies, and, although 
many daring hunters lost their lives, pierced, 
trodden and swung in the air, the animals were 
gradually separated and surrounded singly. 

All at once a great elephant broke through the 
circle of warriors with assagais sticking in its back 
and flanks, and ran with lifted trunk in its flight 
directly to the place where Pieter lay concealed. 
There was no time for the boy to spring up and 
run away. If he arose the animal would seize 
him with its trunk ; if he lay still it would 
trample him under foot. He lay paralyzed with 
fear ; but when the giant form appeared directly 
above him, he recovered himself with an effort, 
fired his gun without aiming, and cried out at 
the same time, involuntarily, with the full 
strength of his lungs. 

The elephant, astonished at the shot and cry, 
since he could see no enemy, stopped, trumpeted 
loudly and turned aside. Soon the hunters 
overtook him, and he sank dying to the ground. 
In a short time all the animals had fallen, bleed- 
ing from many wounds, but it was almost an 


108 


THE BOEB BOY 


hour before all were dead, as the wounds were 
not deep, and they died only from loss of blood. 
Till the last moment they gazed reproachfully at 
their merciless enemies, and tenderly embraced 
their dead young with their trunks. 

Next morning the tusks were broken from 
the elephants and the journey was continued, 
this time in a southeastern direction over the 
mountains. After a three-hours , march they 
were joined by an army whose leader they 
recognized as Dabulamanzi, the king’s brother. 

The prince was a handsome man, perhaps 
ten years younger than the king. His hair 
was cut short, and his only ornaments were a 
heavy gold head-ring and a gold necklace. 
He carried a gun and cartridge jacket. His 
followers were also armed with breech-loaders. 

The party soon reached a little mountain 
from whose summit they overlooked a wide 
green valley broken by little elevations. 
Through it flowed two beautiful rivers — the 
Black and White Umvolosi — wandering be- 
tween rocky banks and uniting in the distance. 
In the angle between the two lay several kraals, 
before which stood a large army. 

The king turned to the missionary with a 


ROYAL MANOEUVRES AND HUNTING 109 


triumphant glance. “ My father has seen only 
a portion of Cetewayo’s army,” he said. “ Now 
he will see another part. Dabulamanzi rules in 
Mainze-kanze. Tell the English Induna that 
Mainze-kanze means : ‘ Let the enemy come.’ ” 
The white men soon saw why the kraal bore so 
proud a name. When they reached the foot of 
the mountain ten thousand warriors in turn 
marched up, all armed with guns. They were 
divided into regiments, distinguished by colors, 
and there were also four regiments of Amatongas, 
a people dwelling north of the Zulus, who recog- 
nized the sovereignty of Cetewayo. Their 
headdress was especially striking. Some regi- 
ments wore white or spotted forehead bands of 
ox or tiger skin, bound together at the back of 
the head, with white oxtails depending there- 
from like a white peruke. Over these headbands 
rose the huge crown of hair, adorned with 
feathers, with the ‘effect of high caps or helmets. 
One regiment really wore caps, made of black 
or spotted skins, adorned with feathers. The 
breasts of these warriors were covered with 
bunches of hair hanging from the neck orna- 
»ment, and they were known as the “ Regiment 
of the King,” and were commanded by a 


110 


THE BOER BOY 


younger brother of Humbati. All these war- 
riors carried the shield, assagai and spear in the 
left hand, the breech-loader in the right. 

The king also proudly displayed a powder 
factory, cartridge factory, and a magazine of 
weapons, in charge of a white man, whom the 
guests suspected was a criminal escaped from 
the colonies. 

Twenty men were next ordered out and placed 
two hundred feet from a target painted to rep- 
resent a Boer. These shot very well, hitting 
the figure in the head or breast. 

When the king noticed the intense interest 
with which Pieter looked at the target and 
clutched his gun, he told the missionary to tell 
the boy that he might shoot with the king’s 
guard for a wager. 

Flushed with pleasure the boy stepped forth. 
When he shot, the man at the target instantly 
pointed to a hole exactly in ’the middle of the 
face. The king nodded. 

“ Please say to the king,” said Pieter to the 
missionary, “ that I will now hit the right eye 
of the figure.” 

“ Let him do it,” cried Cetewayo. “ The 
Zulus shall do the same.” 


ROYAL MANCEUVRES AND HUNTING 111 

Pieter aimed, the gun cracked, and the man 
pointed to the exact spot. Nine of the Zulus 
struck the figure, but not one of them touched 
the eye. The tenth struck it, and the king 
nodded, satisfied. 

Pieter was pricked with ambition, and, 
being angry that the target should represent one 
of his countrymen, determined to show the Zulus 
what shooting was. “That is no mark for a 
Boer,” he said proudly. “ Let them place a 
crane’s feather on a spear point, and set it far- 
ther away.” 

The little black feather was set up three hun- 
dred paces away, where the Englishman and 
the missionary could not even see it. The Zulus 
were commanded to shoot first. All missed it 
save the man who had struck the eye of the 
figure. His ball shattered the spear close to the 
point. 

“Good! Very good!” cried the king, and 
commanded one of his courtiers to take off his 
golden armband and present it to the fortunate 
marksman. 

Another spear was set up. Pieter’s gun 
cracked, and the little feather disappeared, 
leaving the spear still standing. 


112 


THE BOER BOY 


The king cried approval, though rage shone 
in his eyes. With an evident effort he called 
the boy to him, drawing a ring from his finger. 
“ Here/' said he, “ is a reward for your shoot- 
ing. King Cetewayo thanks you for the ex- 
ample you have given him.” 

The king turned away, followed by his 
retinue. Pieter looked at the ring. It was very 
thick and heavy and set with a sparkling ruby. 
As it was much too large for his finger he hung 
it round his neck on a thin leather strap. The 
missionary watched him with a troubled face, 
for he feared the king’s anger. 

The king was indeed very angry. The 
entire manoeuvres had displeased him, and the 
Boer boy’s shooting had increased his ill-liumor. 
But he turned his wrath against his own people. 
Assembling his court, he summoned the leader 
of the regiment, Humbati’s brother. 

“ Lay down your shield and spear,” he com- 
manded, threateningly. 

All present Avere filled with terror. Humbati 
turned pale and leaned forward anxiously. The 
young Induna obeyed. He was a handsome, 
slender man, with intelligent face, his head 
adorned with a golden ring. As lie knelt 


ROYAL MANOEUVRES AND HUNTING 113 

before tlie king deep silence reigned in the as- 
sembly. 

“ I am not satisfied with your regiment,” said 
Cetewayo. “As the regiment of the king it 
should be an example to all other warriors. 
But you have led the warriors as if they were a 
herd of oxen.” 

The Induna kept his eyes fixed on the king’s 
face. Although he w^as kneeling, dignity and 
pride spoke in his carriage. Not a muscle in 
his nobly cut face moved. 

“You are a dead man,” continued the king, 
“ but ” — he turned to the missionary — “ I will 
do to-day what I have never done before — I 
will spare your life for the sake of my father 
and friend, who does not like to see me shed 
blood, for I love him. But you must be de- 
graded your whole life. You shall no longer 
associate with the noble of the land or come into 
the cities of the princes, or take part in the 
royal feasts. Take up your spear and shield 
again, and enter that regiment which lies far 
away by the great water.” 

The Induna dropped his head, then lifted it 
again, crossed his arms over his breast and re- 
plied, “ O King, sadden not my heart ! I have 


8 


114 


THE BOER BOY 


deserved your i n clemency, let me be killed as a 
chief! How can I live among the dogs of the 
king, and disgrace this sign of honor which I 
wore among the mighty ?” He pointed to the 
golden head-ring. “ No ; I can no longer 
live ; let me die, O Pezulu.” 

“It is well,” said the king. “ Your wish is 
granted.” 

At his nod, warriors stepped forth, bound the 
prince’s hands and led him away. Humbati 
made a movement as if to follow them, but re- 
strained himself and murmured so that the 
king could hear, “ The king is just ; he is very 
just. Humbati knows his brother no more.” 

But the Englishman whispered to the mis- 
sionary : “ If I were the king and had seen 
Humbati’s look, I should have uneasy nights.” 

That evening Cetewayo called Lord Fitzher- 
bert to him. He told the young man that he 
would dismiss him, charged with a message to 
the Governor of Natal. He was to tell him that 
Cetewayo was England’s best friend ; the Boers 
her worst enemy. Cetewayo would help the 
English against the Boers with an army of thirty 
thousand men, half the regiments armed with 
guns. The Englishman replied that he would 


ROYAL MANOEUVRES AND HUNTING 115 


carry tlie message, but the king must remember 
that he was a young man, not one of the great In- 
dunas, and he could not promise that his errand 
would be successful. Yet he was convinced that 
the Governor would know how to honor the 
great power of Cetewayo, and would recognize 
the alliance according to its true significance. 

Cetewayo commanded one of the Indunas to 
bring him a magnificent pearl necklace, which 
he handed to the Englishman. “ England Indu- 
nas do not wear such ornaments,” he said, “ but 
you can hang the chain about your sweetheart’s 
neck as a remembrance of Cetewayo. Journey 
where you will, the country lies before you.” 

The young man blushed, recalling a soft- 
eyed girl at home who might some day wear 
this precious gift. Then, drawing out his costly 
watch, he handed it to the king. 

“ I know that the gift is not worthy the 
king,” he said, “ but perhaps you will give the 
plaything to one of your favorite wives as a 
keepsake from the Englishman who thanks you 
for his freedom.” 

That afternoon Humbati announced to Lord 
Fitzherbert that he was to start away at sun- 
set, and that he himself would accompany 


116 


THE BOER BOY 


him to the frontier, there to await the answer 
from the Governor of Natal. 

The missionary observed the Zulu closely, 
and noticed that his voice had a peculiar ring, 
and his face, formerly so calm, had a peculiar 
and unwonted expression. He seemed to be 
moved by a secret thought; his eyes sparkled 
with a gloomy fire ; his whole attitude of com- 
posure seemed forced. 

It could not be grief for his brother alone, 
for it was not softness, but secret rage. Was 
Humbati angry with the white men because of 
his brother’s death ? Pieter felt that in some 
way his agitation was connected with Lord Fitz- 
herbert’s journey. He must have brought it 
about himself that he, so noble a man, was named 
as companion on the journey, for this office could 
very well have been borne by some one of lower 
degree. 

Over these things the missionary pondered as 
he, with the sad Boer boy, watched the little train 
depart, the setting sun shining on the English- 
man’s sword, the golden head-ring of the chief, 
and the spear points of the warriors who formed 
the escort until they disappeared behind a dis- 
tant hill. 


CHAPTEK XI 


THE ADVENT OF THE RAINMAKER 

Now, for the first time, Pieter realized 
that lie was in captivity. During the months 
that he and Lord Fitzherbert had been together 
in Cetewayo’s kraal a true friendship had grown 
up between the two. The Englishman had 
taught Pieter many things concerning the great 
world of which the boy knew nothing, and the 
boy had learned to speak English very well, and 
witli the accent of a man of quality. But now 
all was changed. There was no more riding, 
no more hunting. He and the missionary sat 
together in their hut, and while they were 
treated with great respect, felt the restraint of 
their situation. They were constantly sur- 
rounded by servants of the king, who watched 
them like jailers. 

The government of Cetewayo was a despotism 

117 


118 


THE BOER BOY 


in the fullest sense of the word. The persons 
of his subjects, as well as their possessions, were 
the property of the tyrant, who disposed of them 
as he thought best. No one in the kingdom 
dared to express an opinion on any subject, with 
the exception of Dabulamanzi, who was heard 
in all affairs of the army. That the king did 
not become angry when the missionary spoke so 
independently to him was a riddle to the whole 
court, the only solution of which was that he 
was a wizard. Cetewayo himself seemed some- 
times inclined to this opinion, and once asked 
the missionary seriously, when the rainy season 
was slow in coming, whether he could make it 
rain. He could not believe that it was by any 
natural means that the missionary approached 
him so fearlessly and thought not of his own 
advantage. 

After their return to Ulundi, the king became 
much disturbed by the continued drought, and 
called on his rainmakers, who, after much effort, 
informed the king that the sky was stone and 
that their combined efforts would not soften it ; 
that he would better send for the celebrated 
rainmaker of the Swazis. 

Only the most skillful of the native doctors 


THE ADVENT OF THE RAINMAKER 119 

undertook to exercise power over the sky, and 
their hold on the people was wonderful, often 
proving a serious obstacle to the introduction of 
Christianity. Consequently the missionary 
looked forward to the arrival of this man with 
some curiosity. 

When the rainmaker appeared in the dis- 
tance the people ran forth from their huts, 
screaming for joy, and presently could be 
seen running toward a small stream near 
the city, the rainmaker having commanded 
them all to wash their feet before he entered 
the city. 

While the people were still washing, dark 
clouds began to appear in the clear sky, and a 
few drops of rain fell. The excited people 
danced, sang, blew on their musical instruments, 
and acted as if struck with sudden madness. In 
the midst of this sudden tumult the rainmaker 
strode forward proudly, with erect head and un- 
moved countenance. He was a stately man, 
gorgeously attired. On his head there rose a 
foot-high structure of hair, feathers, pearl chains, 
and gold ornaments. From his breast, arms, 
and legs hung costly chains and wonderful 
ornaments of bone and ivory. When the 


120 


THE BOEll BOY 


chiefs greeted him, he thanked them indiffer- 
ently. 

Thus was he escorted in triumph to the 
dwelling of one of the most famous doctors of 
Ulundi, where he was surrounded by a dense 
circle of people. Here he replied to the doctor’s 
questions, which were propounded for the pur- 
pose of displaying his wisdom. In the mean- 
time the clouds had rolled away and the sun 
was again shining. 

“ Great wisdom is necessary to rule the 
heavens,” said he. “Only a few men know the 
secret, but I understand it well. You will be 
surprised. Look over the country ; all is yel- 
low, dry, and burned, but within a short time 
you will look again, and as far as you can see 
everything will be green, and there will not be 
enough hands to bring in the corn. Listen to 
me : In the former years the Swazi were injured 
by the Bapedis, and they mustered an army to 
punish their enemy. But the Indunas came to 
me and said, 'Help us and you shall have a 
hundred oxen and four golden chains.’ I an- 
swered, ‘ Count on me ; I will help you.’ I 
went to the frontier of the Bapedis before the 
Swazi army was mustered. I stretched out my 


THE ADVENT OF THE RAINMAKER 121 


hand and spoke to the ruler of the clouds. Fire 
fell from heaven on the kraal of the Bapedis. 
They wished to flee, but I stretched out this 
hand, and so heavy a rainstorm fell that all the 
fugitives were drowned. 

“ Hear me further : The Bechuanas were in 
great need, and had given me two hundred 
oxen, six women, and much ivory, that I might 
make it rain on their dry land. But while I 
was there they became frightened, because the 
King of Heroro threatened them with war. 
They gave me two hundred more oxen and 
many treasures. I threw my staff against 
Heroro, who had assembled many warriors and 
was marching toward the frontier. Where the 
staff fell the earth opened and a stream of water 
gushed forth. It became larger and larger, and 
reached the feet of Heroro. It mounted to his 
knee, to his breast. Then flight helped him 
not. All Heroro had to drown ; not one re- 
turned to his land.” 

These and many similar stories the rainmaker 
told with the greatest readiness and composure, 
shrewdly watching the effect of his words on 
the assembly. His voice was now soft and in- 
sinuating, now threatening and thundering ; his 


122 


THE BOER BOY 


gestures were majestic. As he talked the en- 
thusiasm of the people increased. A beautiful 
hut was presented to him, and many cattle and 
servants. 

The rainmaker soon heard of the missionary 
and made a call alone on the white magician. 
“ We must deal openly with one another,” he 
said to the missionary. “ If we are friends, we 
can become rich. But if we are enemies, we 
will injure each other at the same time, and 
the stupid people will scoff at us. AVise men 
should be friends, for they stand alone against 
the people.” 

He was piqued at the missionary’s refusal to 
consider him a comrade, and when the promised 
rain failed to fall he began to speak of secret 
knaves who were experienced in magic and were 
envious of his arts. He also attempted to in- 
fluence the king against the missionary. 

As the days passed by in cloudless clearness, 
the rainmaker made many attempts to bring 
rain ; he had the people gather roots and herbs 
to kindle the “ fire of mystery he built great 
fires on the hills to raise a wind ; he had the 
dead unearthed and reburied ; but nothing 
availed, and the cattle died in herds in the sun- 


THE ADVENT OF THE RAINMAKER 123 


dried meadows, and many people perished from 
starvation. 

One day he told the people that if only he 
had a live baboon, on whom not a single hair 
was missing, he could make rain with it. “ With- 
out it, it would be impossible,” he said. 

As the baboons about Ulundi lived on almost 
inaccessible heights, he thought himself safe in 
making such a statement, but he did not reckon 
on the fearless Zulus. Three of them were 
killed, three broke limbs, and many were 
wounded in the chase, but at nightfall they 
returned home in triumph, bearing the 
baboon. 

The rainmaker was somewhat disconcerted, 
but he hastened to examine the baboon critically. 
“Oh, oh!” he cried. “My heart is torn to 
pieces! I am silent from grief! Do you not see 
that the baboon is scratched, and has lost several 
hairs ? Did I not say that I could not make it 
rain if he had lost a single hair ?” 

So he continued with many preposterous de- 
vices to deceive the people, but when the drought 
continued, he came one night in secret to the 
missionary’s hut. “ You are a friend of the 
king,” he said ; “ tell him he must save me.” 


124 


THE BOER BOY 


“ What !” cried the missionary. “ Are you 
in need of help ?” 

“ It is the women, ” cried the rainmaker, de- 
spairingly. “ They stir up their husbands 
against me. Do women in your land meddle in 
public affairs ?” 

The missionary smiled. “ Christianity 
teaches that men and women are of equal im- 
portance, ” he said. “Do you not know that 
the great kingdom of England is ruled by a 
woman ?” 

“ It is a horrible thought !” cried the rain- 
maker. “ May Christianity never come to us ! 
I wish all women were men. I can manage the 
men, but it is impossible to do anything with 
the women.” 

“Yes,” said the missionary. “The women 
keep house, and feel most the need of water.” 

“ They will kill me,” said the rainmaker, 
despairingly. “Tell me what to do to quiet 
them.” 

“ Tell the truth,” said the missionary. “ Con- 
fess that you cannot make it rain, and I will 
beg the king to protect you.” 

“ That is impossible,” replied the rainmaker. 
“ Then the other doctors would kill me.” 


THE ADVENT OF THE RAINMAKER 125 


“ It is better always to tell the truth and 
leave the consequences to God,” said the mis- 
sionary. 

“ Save me !” implored the rainmaker. “ I 
am a lost man !” 


CHAPTER XII 


THE DEPARTURE FROM ZULULAND 

While tlie missionary was wondering how 
lie might save the forlorn rainmaker, a messen- 
ger summoned him to the king. He found the 
monarch on the veranda of his palace, with 
Prince Sirajo beside him. 

“ Come nearer, my father,” said Cetewayo. 
“ I need my father’s knowledge. The English 
do not like to speak through the mouth of 
the Indunas, but they send a paper to the 
king.” 

The missionary saw that the answer to Cete- 
wayo’s proposal had arrived, and that the 
manner of its coming had angered the monarch. 

“ I am at the king’s service,” he replied. 
“ Has Humbati brought this letter?” 

“ Humbati !” cried the king. “ Where is 
Humbati ? Where is the bird that flew away 
126 


THE DEPARTURE FROM ZULULAND 127 

over the plain? Humbati has not returned. 
He is a traitor, he who possessed the ear of the 
king, he who knew the secrets of my breast, 
for I bore him near my heart as my friend and 
brother — Humbati has become a traitor to me. 
But read me this letter which English horse- 
men carried to the kraal of my brother Sirajo.” 

“ ‘ In the service of her Majesty, the Queen/ ” 
read the missionary. “ ‘ The Governor-General 
of Cape Colony and Upper Commissary for the 
affairs of the natives, Sir Bartle Frere to King 
Cetewayo. Her Majesty’s Government acknowl- 
edges the receipt of King Cetewayo’s message, 
which he has sent by Lord Adolphus Fitzher- 
bert, lieutenant in her Majesty’s service, and 
thanks the king for the kind and honorable treat- 
ment which he has accorded the British officer.’ ” 

The face of the king cleared at these words. 

“ ‘ Sir Bartle Frere thanks the king for the 
expression of his friendly disposition toward 
the British possessions, and expresses the hope 
that these friendly intentions may be made 
good in deed, in order that there may always 
be neighborly relations between Zululand 
and Natal. This proof by deed is lacking at 
the present time, for several offenses along the 


128 


THE BOER BOY 


frontier have been very recently committed by 
subjects of the king.’ 

“ What!” cried the king. “ But read on!” 

“ 4 Twice armed men have swum the lower 
Tugela and the Buffalo, and have carried off 
cattle belonging to farmers under British pro- 
tection. Besides this, a still more heinous 
offence was committed. Two women from the 
kraal of Sirajo — ’ ” • 

“ Ha !” cried the king. “ Bead on !” 

“ ‘ Two women from the kraal of Sirajo es- 
caped and sought protection on British territory. 
Thereupon a number of warriors came ten miles 
into British territory, took the women by force, 
dragged them back to the kraal of Sirajo, and 
stoned them to death, showing not only their 
disdain for British laws, but a cruel and savage 
disposition.’ ” 

“ Stop !” said the king. “ What does this 
mean, Sirajo ?” 

“ The Englishman writes the truth,” replied 
the prince. “ Two of my women were refrac- 
tory, and when I would punish them, fled 
secretly. I learned through spies where they 
were, had them brought back, and killed them, 
as was fitting.” 


THE DEPARTURE FROM ZULULAND 129 

“ You are right,” replied the king, “ and the 
Englishman is insolent to complain of it. But 
it would have been wiser, my brother, not to 
have given these overbearing men a pretext for 
complaint at such a time. If you cannot act 
more shrewdly in the future I cannot continue 
you in the chief command on the frontier. 
Bead on.” 

“ ‘ The king is certainly very ignorant of 
English laws and conditions/ ” read the mission- 
ary, “ ‘ if he supposes that the Government of 
Cape Colony would make an alliance with him 
for war against the Transvaal. The Transvaal 
Boers are good and loyal subjects of the queen, 
and their land will be protected by the British 
Government, and not injured by it. King 
Cetewayo has long demanded the district of 
Utrecht, but he must understand that he has no 
claim to it whatever.’ I pray you,” said the 
missionary, “ consider that I only read. Let 
not your wrath fall upon me, who am innocent.” 

The missionary had reason to make this re- 
quest, for the king was so furious that he 
breathed with difficulty, and his right hand 
grasped the ivory sceptre as if he would fell 
the reader of the message to the ground. 


9 


130 


THE BOER BOY 


“ Head !” lie cried. 

“ 4 The Governor-General,’ ” continued the 
missionary, “ 4 wishes to live in peace with Cete- 
wayo, for in peace the welfare of both the British 
and Zulu kingdoms increases. But lie would 
have good security for the statement that Cete- 
wayo really loves peace. Why has Cetewayo so 
large a standing army ? The British Govern- 
ment feels disquieted at this, for an armed power 
of more than forty thousand men so near its pos- 
sessions is a perpetual menace. It makes the king 
the following proposition : The king must lessen 
the number of his army in a way agreed upon 
with the Governor-General. The king must 
abandon the fortified kraals along the Tugela 
and Buffalo, and must move his garrisons fur- 
ther back. The king must surrender the Bay 
of Santa Lucia to the English, for through this 
bay he receives weapons and ammunition from 
foreign ships, and the, British Government fears 
that these weapons will be used in war against 
the British possessions. Finally, the king shall 
allow a British Minister resident to dwell in 
Ulundi, and take part in all the important 
councils of the king and his Indunas. If the 
king will consent to these conditions, the British 


THE DEPARTURE FROM ZULULAND 131 

Government can reckon with security on the 
peaceful intentions of the Zulu Government, 
and then peace and friendship will reign be- 
tween the two, and the Governor-General will 
do everything to advance the wishes of Cete- 
wayo. For it is the sincere desire of the British 
Government to keep peace with Cetewayo and 
to lend support to all undertakings of Cetewayo, 
whose aim is the good of his country and his 
people. The king need not fear that the British 
Government prepares war against him. It only 
secures itself out of love for peace against the 
warlike desires of the Zulus. The Governor- 
General greets King Cetewayo/ ” 

“ Ha r cried the king, gasping with rage. 
“ Ha ! O ! O ! Sirajo ! Assemble my army ! 
Dabulamanzi shall march out ! O Humbati ! 
This is Humbati’s hand ! The traitor ! Sirajo, 
bring me this traitor from the hands of the 
English, that I may tear his heart from his 
breast with my teeth !” 

The veins on the king’s forehead swelled, his 
eyes became bloodshot, and, gasping, he fell for- 
ward insensible. 

As soon as Cetewayo had recovered he set 
himself to drilling his army. All were equipped 


132 


THE BOER BOY 


with guns ; the regiments were brought from 
Mainze-kanze and manoeuvres held together. 
Pieter learned from the boastful Zulus of a new 
manoeuvre practiced with great success. A 
little corps was brought forward and the rest of 
the army attacked it. Then the main body of 
the warriors formed a long line that marched 
against the enemy and gradually stopped in the 
middle, the two wings swinging about and shut- 
ting the enemy in the semicircle. The mis- 
sionary became much disturbed during these 
preparations for war lest the king’s wrath should 
fall on him and Pieter. But they were still 
treated with respect, and supplied with food, 
though they yet were confined through the 
weary weeks like prisoners in their huts. They 
were precious days to Pieter, however, for, to 
while away their tediousness, the missionary gave 
him much instruction in history, geography, and 
mathematics, so that his mind developed in pro- 
portion to his body, and a new world was 
revealed to him that would have forever remained 
unknown had he stayed in his old home. 

Toward the close of the year Cetewayo sent 
for the missionary. 

“You were my father,” he said gently. 


THE DEPARTURE FROM ZULULAND 138 

“ Cetewayo’s lieart has not forgotten what good 
you did him. I see that your heart is sad, and 
longs for the land of King William. Go ; I 
leave the land open to you, and when you return 
home, tell your king that Cetewayo was good to 
you.” 

The missionary expressed his regret that he 
had not accomplished his purpose in Zulu- 
land. 

“ You wish,” asked the king, “ that I and my 
people would lay aside our weapons and wor- 
ship the invisible God ?” 

“ I have scarcely the courage to speak of 
Christianity,” said the missionary, “ but I should 
like to give you some advice in regard to this 
war you wish to enter into.” 

“ Say not that I wish to enter into war,” said 
the king bitterly. “ It is the English. They 
have surrounded me with weapons, as the hunt- 
ers surround the elephants. It is necessary to 
fight — therefore, I will go against my enemy and 
conquer and be powerful, or die as befits a king ! 
Go, take your friend, your servants, and your 
oxen, before war begins. Try no longer to melt 
the heart of the king !” 

“ Farewell, then, and the Almighty be with 


134 


THE BOER, BOY 


you,” cried the missionary, solemnly raising his 
hands. 

When Pieter heard the good news he was 
intoxicated with joy. At last he would again 
see his family from whom he had been separated 
almost a year. How were they ? Plow would 
they look? Was the community prospering? 
His imagination painted everything in glowing 
colors, and the long distance, the hardships and 
perils of the journey seemed in his joy quite in- 
significant. 

They traveled for eight days, passing through 
the valley of the Inlangana River, on the bor- 
der of Zululand, and approached one of the 
Zulu outposts, where the armed escort sent by 
Cetewayo turned back. Pieter now rode in ad- 
vance of the wagon, gun in hand, to be ready 
for any attack on the unquiet frontier. The 
missionary wished to reach Potgieter’s Farm on 
this day that they might pass the night in se- 
curity. 

But at evening the farm had not appeared, 
and they continued the journey by starlight, 
passing through a valley, where groups of trees 
cast a dense shadow on the road. All at once 
Pieter stopped his horse at the sound of voices. 


THE DEPARTURE FROM ZULULAND 135 


As he turned his horse back to the wagon to 
stop it, a number of dark forms appeared at the 
side of the road and shots sounded. Imme- 
diately thereupon a dozen black warriors ran 
forward, stopped the oxen and began to plunder 
the wagon. While Pieter was endeavoring to 
drive them back an English subaltern ap- 
peared. 

“ You rascals !” he cried, pushing them away 
with the butt end of his gun, “ have I stationed 
you as pickets in order to steal ?” Then he 
apologized to the missionary for the stupidity 
of his Swazi soldiers : “ They are like cattle/’ 
he said. “ Actually, they would shoot at the 
Queen’s carriage — God save her ! — if Her Most 
Gracious Majesty should happen to go out riding 
here.” 

“ Now let us go in peace,” said the mis- 
sionary, when quiet had been restored. 

“ I regret that it is not possible,” replied the 
subaltern. “ My orders are to lead all travelers 
from Zululand to the commander. You must 
follow me.” 

“ Whither ?” asked the missionary. 

“ To Commander La Trobe Lonsdale, in his 
quarters at Potgieter’s Farm.” 


CHAPTER XIII 


PIETER MARITZ PARTS WITH THE OLD 
MISSIONARY 

The journey continued for another half-hour 
before they arrived at the camp where were 
stationed more than a thousand Swazi soldiers, 
a tribe always unfriendly to the Zulus, under 
the command of LaTrobe Lonsdale and several 
young English subalterns. It extended from 
Natal to New Scotland, and formed the outer- 
most post on the border between the Transvaal 
and Zululand. Farther back, in Utrecht and 
other places, English columns for attack were 
being formed under Colonel Wood. 

La Trobe Lonsdale was aroused, and ordered 
the newcomers to Lis tent. He was greatly 
astonished that Cefrewayo had spared any whites 
in his power, and rejoiced to see before him peo- 
ple who could give him information concerning 
136 


PIETER TARTS WITH THE MISSIONARY 137 

the conditions in Zululand. His surprise in- 
creased when the missionary and Pieter refused 
this information on the ground that it would be 
treachery to the king, whose guests they had 
been. 

After a moment’s thought the officer an- 
nounced that on account of the age and calling 
of the missionary he would place no obstacle in 
the way of his journey, but that the young man, 
being a Boer, must go to headquarters at 
Utrecht, to Colonel Wood. 

“ I will let you keep your horse and weapons,” 
he said, “ because I trust you will make no 
attempt to escape. ' You will bethink yourself 
of what patriotism dictates to every English 
subject.” 

The next morning Pieter sadly bade farewell 
to the old missionary, who had been his com- 
panion for so many long months, and started on 
his journey to Utrecht. In spite of the fact 
that he was, perhaps, going toward imprison- 
ment, Pieter felt the exhilaration of being again 
on Jager’s back in the open, and rode swiftly 
with the two slender Swazis, who accompanied 
him as a guard. Toward evening the black 
chain of the Balebasberg appeared, and just as 


138 


THE BOER BOY 


the sun sank they passed through a valley at 
whose exit lay the city of Utrecht. The lights 
of the city became visible, horn signals sounded, 
all the noises of a camp were heard. The stars 
shone brightly from a dark-blue sky, and warm 
winds blew from the plain toward the mountains. 

A troop of riders hailed the arrivals, Boers 
fully armed, and accompanied them into 
Utrecht. The wide streets were fdled with a 
heterogeneous crowd. English infantry in red 
coats, black soldiers and Kafir women running 
about with baskets on their heads filled with 
food for the troops. Without the city stood 
long rows of white, pointed tents. 

Before the handsomest house in Utrecht, a 
two-story building with glass windows brightly 
lighted, they halted. It was the first time 
Pieter had ever seen a city with houses built in 
the European fashion, and he fancied himself in 
fairyland. 

They passed the red-coated sentry and entered 
the hall, where stood a crowd of men in red 
coats and Boers’ blouses. An officer took 
Pieter’s letter from Commander Lonsdale to 
Colonel Wood and presently returned to usher 
him into that officer’s presence. 


PIETER PARTS WITH THE MISSIONARY 139 

The first sight that struck Peter’s surprised 
eyes when he entered the room was the well- 
known figures of Molihabantschi and Prince 
Sirajo, gorgeously adorned, sitting in the middle 
of the room. Before them, at a long table cov- 
ered with maps and papers, sat an officer, his 
breast decorated with several orders. A Zulu 
in European clothes stood near the table. 

“ Come nearer,” cried the officer to Pieter. 
“ Commander Lonsdale writes me that you come 
from Ulundi. Do you understand Zulu well 
enough to act as an interpreter ?” 

“ I think so,” replied the youth. “ I lived 
almost a year in Ulundi, and I learned the lan- 
guage j3retty well.” 

“ If you understand it as well as you do Eng- 
lish you are a master,” said Colonel Wood. 
“ Who in the world was your English teacher ?” 

“ Lord Adolphus Fitzherbert.” 

“ Are you mad ?” asked the officer. “ But 
now I recall it, I did hear that Lord Fitzherbert 
had been a prisoner among the Zulus.” 

“ I cannot understand clearly what these em- 
bassadors want to say,” continued he, “ and I 
do not think that our interpreter is reliable. 
Let them give their message to you, and you 


140 


THE BOER BOY 


tell it to me. One of them, if I have under- 
stood correctly, is a brother of Cetewayo.” 

“ These men are Prince Sirajo, a brother of 
the king, and Molihabantsclii, one of the highest 
counsellors/’ said Pieter, after he had spoken 
with the Zulus. “ I know them both. They 
say that King Cetewayo wishes peace. He re- 
grets his subjects’ depredations along the fron- 
tier, and will not let it occur again. He 
expresses his astonishment that the English are 
collecting in such numbers along his borders, 
and prays for information concerning the aim 
and object of these troops. He is especially 
disquieted over the erection of Fort Luneburg, 
asks for a satisfactory explanation of England’s 
war-like preparations, since he would like to 
be notified in order to make preparations for war 
on his side.” 

“ Ask the embassadors,” said Colonel Wood, 
shrugging his shoulders, “ whether Cetewayo 
does not know the demands of the Governor- 
General : The reduction of his army, drawing 
back the garrisons from the frontier, the recep- 
tion of a British resident at Ulundi, and the 
cession of the Bay of Santa Lucia?” 

The eyes of the Zulus blazed when Pieter 


PIETER PARTS WITH THE MISSIONARY 141 

translated this question. “The king has not 
replied to these demands,” said they, “ because 
they are not conformable to his royal dignity.” 

“The conditions of the Governor-General 
are clear and distinct,” said Colonel Wood. “ If 
Cetewayo will not comply with them, the Eng- 
lish troops will open the war. Let the embas- 
sadors tell him that.” 

The Zulus arose proudly. “ Let it be war, 
then !” cried Sirajo, threateningly, and the two 
strode forth together. 

Pieter could see from the amusement of the 
English officers over this incident that they had 
little idea of Cetewayo’s power in war. As they 
no longer paid any attention to him, he was 
preparing to leave the room, when Colonel W ood 
called him. 

“Now, young man,” said he, “sit down here 
and tell me at once what you know of the Zulus. 
How many troops has Cetewayo ? How are they 
armed ? What is their manner of lighting ?” 

“ Pardon me, sir,” said Pieter. “ I cannot 
tell you. As I was Cetewayo’s guest, it would 
be treachery for me to betray him.” 

“ What ?” cried the officer. “ There is no 
joking here. We are at war.” 


142 


THE BOER BOY 


“ For that very reason,” said Pieter, “ I will 
not return thanks for Cetewayo’s generous treat- 
ment by telling his enemies how to attack him.” 

“You hard-headed Boer,” said the officer, 
“think before whom you are standing. You 
are a subject of the Queen, and stand before her 
representative.” 

“ I am not a subject of the Queen of Eng- 
land,” replied the boy, defiantly. “ And you 
cannot give me orders. I am not an inhabitant 
of Natal, but a native of the South African 
Republic.” 

“ Oh, these Boers !” cried the Colonel. “ They 
are as thick-headed as their oxen. We will ap- 
prehend you ; you are a suspicious character.” 

Obedient to the Colonel’s orders, a subaltern 
approached, seized Pieter’s arm roughly and 
dragged him away. The poor boy was broken- 
hearted, thus to see his dreams of home dis- 
appear. He felt that the English were far more 
cruel than the robbers of the Drakenberg, and 
was not even comforted by the assurance of the 
lieutenant who accompanied him that his gun 
and horse should be well cared for. 

Through the crowded streets they passed until 
they reached a house with grated windows, to 


PIETER PARTS WITH THE MISSIONARY 143 

whose owner, an old Boer, the lieutenant con- 
fided the boy. 

The old jailer was kind to the boy of his own 
people, and comforted him as much as possible 
in his imprisonment. Each day the lieutenant 
came to see if Pieter had yet learned who was 
his sovereign, and if he would give information 
concerning the Zulus, and each day Pieter shook 
his head and remained obstinately silent. He 
raged inwardly, but he was determined to stay 
in his cell forever rather than yield. 

The old Boer told him that the English were 
preparing to enter Zululand from three sides — 
Colonel Wood from Transvaal, Colonel Glyn 
from Helpmakaar, in Natal, and Colonel Pearson 
from Greyton, in Natal — and march toward 
Ulundi. Sir Bartle Frere had had the ultima- 
tum read on the banks of the Tugela, and as 
Cetewayo had not accepted it, war had begun. 

On January 14tli, the old man told him ex- 
citedly that two days before, the British troops 
had crossed the Buffalo on rafts and boats and 
had stormed Sirajo’s kraal. 

On the 20th of January, when Pieter had 
been in prison for two weeks, he was awakened 
by martial music, and going to the window saw 


144 


THE BOER BOY 


troops marching by. In breathless interest he 
watched the long procession, the English Light 
Horse, the infantry, the artillery, all clad in 
splendid uniform, the like of which the Boer 
boy had never seen before, white helmets, red 
coats, gold braid and glittering arms, mounted 
volunteers, mostly Boers from Natal, and two 
wagon trains of ammunition and provisions. 

Pieter recalled the great horde of Zulus, 
and the little English host, barely three thou- 
sand men strong, seemed very small. How heavy 
and broad-shouldered were these soldiers of the 
Queen in comparison with the tall, slender 
Zulus ! And what quantities of baggage ! what 
an immense amount of food ! During manoeu- 
vers the Zulus ate only once in twenty-four 
hours, or perhaps not at all. An active naked 
carrier with a basket on his head, for every 
wagon of the English, and ten thousand Zulus 
were provided with Kafir corn for several days. 
For their drink ran brooks and rivers. 

But the sight of armed men stirred him. He 
had nothing to do with the wars of the English, 
yet — there were Boers in the procession, and he 
would have found it natural to ride with them. 

The old jailer tapped him on the shoulder. 


PIETER PARTS WITH THE MISSIONARY 145 

“ Come, nephew,” he said, “ your horse stands 
saddled at the door. Colonel Wood is going to 
send a patrol to General Chelmsford to announce 
to him that he has gone to Luneberg, and he 
wants you to go to Lord Chelmsford with them.” 

Pieter jumped up in delight. Whither fate 
would lead him he knew not, but at any rate 
he was to escape from the gloomy prison. 


10 


CHAPTER XIY 


THE BATTLE OF ISANDULA 

Pieter Maritz rode off with the subaltern 
and four men who stood before the prison door, 
feeling like a bird escaped from a cage, such 
joy was it to be on Jager’s back once more, 
under the blue sky. Escape was impossible, as 
the country was so thickly patrolled, so he con- 
cluded that it was best to ride along quietly and 
let the future bring what it might. 

The road which ran south from Utrecht into 
Natal was filled with travelers on foot and in 
wagons, hurrying north in the fear of a Zulu 
invasion. 

It was six o’clock the next evening before they 
had crossed the Buffalo and reached Help- 
makaar, only to find that Lord Chelmsford had 
gone northwest with Colonel Glyn, crossing 
the Buffalo at Rorke’s Drift, and therefore being 
146 


THE BATTLE OF ISANDULA 


147 


now in Zululand. The commander at Help- 
makaar ordered the subaltern to pass the night 
there, and early the next morning to follow Lord 
Chelmsford with the dispatches and the pris- 
oner. 

The following day, January 22d, was clear and 
warm, and when the patrol rode away, about five 
o’clock, the sun’s heat was already oppressive. 
After a two hours’ ride they reached the Buffalo 
River and crossed the ford known as Rorke’s 
Drift. On the Zulu side, ten minutes’ ride from 
the river, stood a mission church and dwelling, 
transformed by the English into a commissariat 
and hospital, and here they breakfasted. 

While Pieter stood quietly beside his horse, 
eating a piece of pastry, he came near choking 
from surprise. In the distance, between two 
cactus bushes, lie saw appear, all at once, a 
black head, with a liairbush atop, bound with 
black and white. It was an easy matter for 
spies to slip up and conceal themselves in the 
rocky bank, full of clefts and ravines, and 
Pieter could have sworn that the owner of the 
liairbush was one of the “ Black Shield” regi- 
ment of Dabulamanzi. 

“ It would be well to look about carefully,” 


148 


THE BOER BOY 


Pieter said to the subaltern, as lie tightened his 
saddle-girth, examined Jager’s hoofs and tested 
his gun. “ The Zulus are nimble-footed, and 
we are on their territory.” 

“ Ha ! ha !” laughed the jovial officer. “ I am 
not at all worried !” 

As they rode forward Pieter spied carefully 
through every hiding place offered by the un- 
even, hilly land. Soon he stopped involuntarily 
at the sight of forms in the distance. They had 
run down a path and quickly disappeared, but 
their red feathers indicated plainly to him 
that they belonged to Dabulamanzi’s second 
regiment. 

“ What’s the matter?” asked the subaltern. 

“ Sir, I see Zulus on our left flank,” replied 
the boy. 

“ Zulus?” asked the subaltern. “ Ghosts, 
maybe. I see nothing. The Zulus will take 
care not to run about here. But perhaps you 
are catching the cannon fever.” And he laughed 
at his own joke. 

Another half hour’s ride and the boy’s prac- 
ticed eye perceived far off, in a little valley to 
the left, dark points, which could only be the 
caps worn by the regiment of the king. He was 


THE BATTLE OF TSANDULA 


1*49 


now convinced that a great force of Zulus was 
in the neighborhood, but he sa id nothing more, 
since it would not have been credited. 

They now arrived at the English tents, 
pitched in a valley not far from which rose a 
steep, isolated mountain. More than a hundred 
wagons were placed in long lines, the draft oxen 
tied to them. The troops — English, Boers and 
blacks, Zulus of Natal and Basutos, one thou- 
sand six hundred men in all, half Africans — 
were busy preparing breakfast. 

“Lord Chelmsford is not here,” said First 
Lieutenant Pulleine, to whom Pieter was taken. 
“ But tell me what you know of the Zulu army. 
Have they guns?” 

“ Of the Zulus I can only say to you, sir,” 
replied Peter, “ that they march very rapidly, 
and are already in the neighborhood.” 

“ How do you know that they are in the 
neighborhood ?” asked the commander in a 
severe tone. 

“ Three times, on the way here, I have seen 
Zulu spies from Dabulamanzi’s army.” 

“ Who is Dabulamanzi ?” 

“ He is the king’s brother, who commands 
the best troops, all armed with breech-loaders.” 


150 


THE BOER BOY 


“Pooh!” said the commander. “Our vi- 
dettes have announced nothing. Lord Chelms- 
ford and Colonel Glyn are both out, and have had 
the whole country searched through. There is 
Lonsdale, too, with his Swazi niggers, who must 
know the country like a book. Surely there are 
not more than a couple of fellows spying around 
out there. However, ride out and see.” 

While Lieutenant Durnford rode out to the 
west with two hundred Basutos, Lieutenant Pul- 
leine turned again to Pieter. 

“ The Zulus march very rapidly, you say ?” 

“ Very rapidly,” replied Pieter. Then he 
added, hesitatingly : “ You will pardon me if I 
express my surprise at your camp.” 

“ How so ?” 

“ When we Boers fight the Kafirs we form a 
circle of wagons, stop up all the holes with thorn 
bushes, and put the draft oxen within the circle. 
Then we shoot from the wagons as from a fort- 
ress. As your wagons are they will he no pro- 
tection to you.” 

The officers laughed, but Lieutenant Pulleine 
replied : “ That is not so had, hut it is not neces- 
sary for English soldiers to creep behind wagons. 
We go toward the enemy.” 


THE BATTLE OF ISANDULA 


151 


Shots were now heard, and it was evident that 
Lieutenant Durnford had found the enemy. 
The soldiers, however, continued their breakfast 
quietly until Lieutenant Pulleine had the alarm 
blown. Then they ran to their guns, and Lieu- 
tenant Durnford came galloping in. 

The Zulus had been gathering from north 
and west, and already single balls were whist- 
ling about the camp, although they were still 
far away. 

Pieter sat on his horse undecided. His 
instinct for battle impelled him to ride forward 
and shoot at the Zulus with the English. 
Another feeling held him back. He had been 
treated kindly by the Zulus, and England was 
his enemy. He determined to watch the con- 
flict for a time and then trust to his horse to 
save him from captivity or death. The peril 
was great, but he could not yet tear himself 
away from the spectacle. 

Behind the scattered, fighting swarms of 
riflemen now appeared long black ranks of 
Zulus on the opposite heights. Begiment after 
regiment climbed down from the height, Dabula- 
manzi among them on horseback. 

The English grew pale in the face of the ter- 


152 


THE BOER BOY 


rible danger, but grim determination spoke in 
their carriage and .faces. The artillerists now 
opened fire, and Pieter, who heard cannon for 
the first time, watched the effect of the shots. 

Great breaches were torn in the advancing 
ranks, but they closed instantly, and the for- 
ward march was not interrupted for an instant. 

A gunshot distant behind the advancing regi- 
ment of fifteen thousand men came another 
dense mass of ])erhaps five thousand, and now 
Pieter saw executed the manoeuvres of which he 
had heard. The regiment of the king 
marched up to the artillery in regular step, but 
the two wings ran to shut in the English in a 
semicircle. 

As the Zulu shields were no protection, they 
suffered a severe loss, for the English stood in 
line and fired steadily, so that the advancing 
ranks must constantly be renewed from behind. 
But the English suffered loss, too, as the Zulus 
fired rapidly during their advance. The Indu- 
nas had the regiments stop, the front ranks fire, 
and then the whole body rush forward again. 
Yet their fire was not to be compared with that 
of the English, and the blood of the whites 
showed plainly its superiority in battle. 


THE BATTLE OF ISANDULA 


153 


Now the enemy was so near that their thun- 
dering battle song almost drowned the roar of 
the cannon, and the terrified black soldiers, who 
had only been kept in order by the sabre blows 
of the English officers, began to flee. Pieter 
saw that the camp would soon be surrounded, 
and that unless he speedily took flight he, too, 
would be destroyed. Yet the smoke and battle 
sounds were fast filling his mind with the intoxi- 
cation of battle, and he hesitated before he 
turned, pressed his knees on the saddle, and fled 
forward in a swift gallop. 

After some moments he j)aused on a little 
height and looked back, fascinated by the hor- 
rible scene before him. The Zulus, now but a 
hundred paces from the English, hurled their 
assagais, and then, seizing their favorite weapon, 
the stabbing assagai, rushed forward with wild, 
demoniac cries for hand-to-hand conflict. The 
English sold their lives dearly. The Zulus, 
shot and stabbed with bayonets, fell in rows. 
But undismayed they lifted the bodies of their 
own killed and wounded, carried them as 
shields and pushed them on the bayonets in 
order to make a way for themselves. 

Man by man the English fell — the subaltern, 


154 


THE BOER BO Y 


who had laughed at Pieter ; First Lieutenant 
Pulleine, Lieutenant Durnford, the officer of 
the artillery, just as he had finished spiking his 
guns, all fighting like heroes, firing pistols and 
swinging sabres until the last. The Zulus 
sprang forward like panthers, shouting their 
hideous war song, drunk with murder, until all 
was wild confusion. The scarlet coats and 
white helmets lay in a river of blood, and the 
naked feet of the black warriors trod on the 
confused mass of dead bodies of men and 
animals, weapons, helmets, provisions, ammu- 
nition, cooking vessels, shattered wagons and 
broken casks and chests. 

Chained to the spot, Pieter stood until he 
suddenly realized that the Zulus were now turn- 
ing to the pursuit of fugitives. Quickly he 
turned his horse. “ Now, old fellow/’ he cried, 
“ show what you can do !” 

It had been his intention to return to Borke’s 
Drift, and amid all the terror of the last half 
hour had kept in mind the position of the sur- 
rounding heights in order not to miss the way 
back. But the Zulus had already cut off flight 
in that direction, and he must ride the nearest 
way to the river and trust to luck to get across. 


THE BATTLE OF ISANDULA 


155 


Already other fugitives had adopted the same 
plan. 

How long the terrible ride lasted he never 
knew, for the minutes dragged like hours, with 
the cries of his swift pursuers ringing in his 
ears, with the death cry of many fallen fugi- 
tives. Soon he had reached the hills near the 
river, and now he was on the height in a nar- 
row path, and could see far below him the 
mirroring surface of the river. The bluff was 
very steep, and there was no beaten path, only 
a sunken place in the midst of impassable 
precipices. Before him ran some fifty black 
men, and a few men on horseback were clam- 
bering down with difficulty. 

As Pieter rode down carefully, he saw behind 
him the red shields of his pursuers. He set 
his teeth as an assagai whistled past and re- 
bounded from the rock wall. Looking back, he 
threatened the Red Shield with his gun, crying 
to them in Zulu, “ Take care!” 

They may have recognized him, for they 
ceased their shouts and followed but slowly. 
Pieter reached the river without accident. The 
bank rose precipitously, so that a ten-foot leap 
was necessary, but there was no time for thought. 


156 


THE BOER BOY 


Others had gone through and so could he. 
Jager sprang, obedient to his direction, and for 
an instant the water closed over the heads of 
horse and rider. Then they arose, and Jager 
swain powerfully through the broad, swift river. 
Fugitives were swimming round about them, 
and some of their pursuers threw themselves 
into the water. Pieter heard a cry for help near 
by, and saw a black head sinking. He seized 
the man by the hand and helped him across. 
Dripping, but uninjured, the boy rode out on 
the right bank of the Buffalo. 


CHAPTER XV 


PIETER MEETS CORPORAL JOUBERT AND 
PRESIDENT KRUGER 

When Pieter found himself safely on the 
Natal side of the river, he thanked Heaven for 
his rescue, and turned his horse to the right to 
ride up along the Buffalo. He thought of 
nothing but home, and wished to get into the 
Transvaal as soon as possible. 

That night he stayed with a hospitable Boer, 
and the next day reached Utrecht, which was 
in great excitement over the news of the defeat. 
Fearing to tell anyone that he had been an eye- 
witness of the disaster lest he be detained, he 
hastened on, riding through Wesselstrom and 
Heidelberg, and reaching Pretoria on the fourth 
day, in which city he hoped to learn the where- 
abouts of his community. 

It was toward evening when he approached 

157 


158 


THE BOER BOY 


Pretoria, and when lie rode over the hills that 
border the wide valley at the south, he saw the 
city spread out at his feet The houses were 
scattered about among gardens, and only in the 
heart of the city were the buildings crowded 
together. An English camp was here, for at 
one side of the city Pieter saw rows of the well- 
known tents. As he drew nearer, he found the 
roads crowded with black women coming from 
market, black men laughable in European gar- 
ments, and Boers on foot and on horseback. 

A little company of the horsemen, Boers, but 
unarmed and elegantly drassed, p>assed him just 
before he reached the first houses. As they 
trotted past, one of them, an older man with dark 
full beard, cast a piercing glance at Pieter, 
checked his horse and asked him in Dutch 
who he was and whence he came. 

At the word “ Isandula” the riders surrounded 
him and looked at him curiously. In answer to 
their questions he told them of his experiences 
of the past year and explained that he was 
trying to find his community, of which Baas van 
der Goot was the leader. 

“ I know Baas van der Goot,” said a fierce- 
looking man with sharp black eyes. “ A true 


PIETER MEETS PRESIDENT KRUGER 159 

Boer is lie — a jiious, respectable man, an ex- 
cellent shot. I saw him two years ago, when I 
led a commando on our northern frontier. He 
had at that time killed many Kafirs with his 
own hand.” 

“ That is Corporal Joubert,” said one of the 
men, in answer to Pieter’s inquiry. 

This, then, was the renowned, feared Joubert, 
of whom he had so often heard the men of his 
community speak. 

“ Are you the son of Andries or Klaas Buur- 
man ?” asked Joubert. 

“ Andries,” replied Pieter. “ My father fell in 
battle last year at the Nyl Biver.” 

“ Andries dead !” exclaimed Joubert. “ He 
was a brave man, and his death is a great loss to 
the republic. I hope his son will fill liis place 
therein.” And he looked with pleasure at the 
boy’s stalwart form and frank face. 

As they rode through the city the men con- 
tinued to question Pieter, and the boy fancied 
that they felt a secret joy in the English defeat 
at Isandula. 

As the first questioner paused before a beau- 
tiful house, he expressed a desire to see Pieter 
again. “You have certainly much more to 


160 


THE BOER BOY 


tell,” said he. “ Can you not come to my 
house for supper this evening, to meet a few of 
my friends ?” 

Pieter flushed with pleasure ; then he looked 
down at his ragged garments. “ You are very 
kind, sir,” said he, “and I should like to come, 
for I am hungry. But you are a great gentle- 
man, and I would better seek entertainment 
with some poor man.” 

The men laughed. “ This young man,” cried 
one, “ has a fine instinct ; he lias smelt out the 
treasurer. You are certainly in need of money, 
young man.” 

He spoke so kindly that Pieter confessed that 
he had not a penny in the world. 

“Then you have come to the right place,” 
said the bearded man, still laughing. “ This is 
Mr. Swart, the State Secretary of the Treasury, 
who has invited you to supper. He will fill 
your purse. I think the state is indebted to 
this young man,” said lie, turning to his friends, 
“ and should compensate him for what he has 
suffered in war service.” 

“ Certainly,” said the treasurer, putting his 
hand in the pocket. “ And it will pay on the 
spot. Here are fifty pounds; buy yourself some 


PIETER MEETS PRESIDENT KRUGER 161 

clothes, my boy, and I shall count on seeing 
you at eight o’clock this evening.” 

Their kindness did not end here. Corporal 
Joubert himself accompanied the boy to find a 
lodging place. Pieter rode as if in a dream 
through the beautiful city, beside which Utrecht 
was a village. The paved streets were wide, 
and though many of the houses were but one 
story, they were built of stone, with glass win- 
dows. There were several churches, and the 
houses were set in the midst of gardens. As 
for the shops — what magic wares were not dis- 
played in their windows ! 

Although the beautiful hotel — the first Pieter 
had ever seen — was full of guests, at Joubert’s 
command the obsequious servant promised to 
find a place for the boy. 

When, after a visit to the shops, he again 
saw his image in the mirror, the white collar 
rising above the blue blouse, the new leather 
trousers, fine riding boots and broad hat, from 
under which rippled his yellow hair, he blushed 
with pleasure at the sight. 

Girding on his cartridge-belt and cutlass, and 
taking his gun, he set out for the secretary’s 
house. Just as he reached it, a carriage stopped 


11 


162 


THE BOER BOY 


before the door and a beautiful girl in a blue 
silk gown, with flowers in her brown hair, 
stepped out. 

Frightened, Pieter fled into the house, where 
his smiling host relieved him of his gun and 
led him into the parlors, where the company 
had assembled. 

The men were all dressed like the servants at 
the hotel, but the appearance of the women was 
such that Pieter, who had looked lions and 
Zulus in the face unterrified, felt the ground 
tremble under his feet. They wore beautiful 
long light silk gowns, and around their necks 
and arms hung sparkling stones and chains like 
those of the great Indunas at Ulundi. Their 
hair, too, was almost as artificially dressed as 
that of the Zulus, but was a prettier color. 
What completed Pieter’s confusion was that 
they had bare necks and arms, and the shim- 
mer of the white skin was a strange sight to 
one so long accustomed to the shining black 
skin of the Zulus. If his host had not held 
his arm the boy would have slipped away. 

When Secretary Swart had presented Pieter 
to his guests the boy was immediately sur- 
rounded by men and women, who greeted him 


PIETER MEETS PRESIDENT KRUGER 1(33 


kindly and asked him innumerable questions. 
Pieter bit his lips, his face became scarlet, and 
as he had not his gun, he did not know what to 
do with his hands. But the guests continued 
to ask him questions about Cetewayo, who had 
become a personage of importance since Isan- 
dula, and to examine the ring which he still 
wore about his neck. 

When supper was announced, the secretary 
asked Pieter to escort his niece, who proved to 
be the pretty girl in the blue gown. Opposite 
him sat a little man with a pale, yellow face 
and long black hair and beard. His hands were 
as brown as Pieter’s, and his dress as unsuitable 
for the occasion. “ Who is he ?” Pieter asked 
his partner. 

“ He is the second lion ; you are the first,” she 
replied, with a roguish smile. Then she ex- 
plained, in reply to his look of amazement: 
“ Lions are interesting people, the center of 
attraction of a company. This man has come 
from the interior of Africa ; he has roamed 
over the whole continent. He is the Portuguese 
Major Serpa Pinto.” 

The table was beautifully set with sparkling 
glass and china, and the menu altogether dif- 


164 


THE BOER BOY 


ferent from that at Ulundi. Given confidence 
by his neighbor’s, friendliness, Pieter asked her 
many questions concerning the strange dishes, 
and she was so natural and helpful that he soon 
overcame his shyness. 

The company continued to ask him questions, 
and when it came out that he had told Colonel 
Wood that he was a citizen of the South African 
Republic, he was loudly applauded. The man 
with the full beard, who had first accosted him 
on the road, made a little speecli in which he 
responded to the toast, “ The South African Re- 
public.” At the conclusion all rose and cheered. 

“Who is lie?” inquired Pieter. 

“ That is Paul Kruger, President of the Re- 
public,” she replied, smiling. 

After supper, when the company had again 
assembled in the parlor to listen to music, Cor- 
poral Joubert called Pieter aside into a little 
room. 

“ Understanding English as you do,” said 
Joubert, “ you are able to render the republic a 
great service. You know the English persist in 
regarding the republic as a British colonial pos- 
session, and because of this bloody dissensions 
may arise at any time. It is, therefore, very 


PIETER MEETS PRESIDENT KRUGER 165 


necessary, for me to liave an accurate knowledge 
of the English army now in South Africa. I 
want to know where are the single divisions and 
how strong they arc, how many officers are with 
the troops, how many horses the cavalry and 
artillery have, and many other things. I want 
to know how old are the English troops, 
whether they are strong or weak, how. they shoot, 
what is their manner of fighting, and whether 
the men obey their officers well. This war with 
the Zulus furnishes the opportunity. You, I 
think, are the right person to procure this in- 
formation for me. Enter this campaign, but 
take care not to get killed. You are going to 
see, not to fight. Your shrewdness can find a 
way. Either attach yourself to the Natal vol- 
unteers or join an English regiment. Remem- 
ber to give me full accounts of everything you 
see, but never in writing — always by word of 
mouth. Will you accept this commission ?” 

“ Willingly,” replied Pieter, “ and I will do 
my best to do it well. But first I must find my 
community, for my mother does not know that I 
am living.” 

“ Good,” replied the corporal. “ Seek out 
your family. There is ample time. Then come 


166 


THE BOER BOY 


back and receive further directions. It occurs 
to me that — but what noise is that ?” 

From the streets came shouts and cries, and 
when they ran to the window, although Preto- 
ria’s streets were unlighted, they could see men 
running past. English soldiers without guns, 
black women and men, all seized by some great 
terror. 


CHAPTER XVI 


PIETER MARITZ’S ENLISTMENT 

“What is the matter?” called Corporal 
Joubert to the people. No one answered, but 
one of the servants ran in crying, “ The Zulus 
are coming !” 

“Nonsense!” thundered Joubert. “Be at 
ease,” he added to the guests who ran in to him. 
“ Such a thing is impossible.” 

“ Zulu ! Zulu !” sounded from the streets 
from the mouths of English, French, Dutch, 
Portuguese, and Kafirs. Drums and horns 
sounded from the English camp and several 
shots were heard. 

At last English officers appeared, driving the 
soldiers back to camp with drawn swords, and it 
turned out as they had supposed — that there 
was no reason for alarm. 

Pieter Maritz fancied he recognized one of 

167 


168 


THE BOEK BOY 


the officers in the dim light — the voice, the 
figure, could belong to no other than Lord 
Adolphus Fitzherbert. “ My Lord Fitzlier- 
bert !” he cried. 

“ Hurrah !” cried the officer. “ That must 
be my Dutch friend !” And springing from 
his horse he seized the Boer boy’s hand. 
“ Hurrah for old Holland ! We must see each 
other again, but just now I have to drive these 
cowards home. They are frightened out of 
their wits by the very name Zulu.” 

The next morning, when Pieter called on Cor- 
poral Joubert to learn more about his trip to the 
north, he found him at a table on which maps 
were spread. He wore a light blue linen blouse, 
open at the throat, and Pieter noticed more 
clearly than he had the day before how like a 
lion looked this celebrated warrior, with his 
broad, high forehead, thick, bristling hair, and 
waving beard. 

“ Tell me, my boy,” was the Corporal’s greet- 
ing, “ can the English shoot ?” 

“ No,” replied the lad. “ They do better 
tli an the Zulus, but they cannot shoot accu- 
rately.” 

“ I thought so. Describe the battle again. 


PIETER MARITZ ? S ENLISTMENT 169 

How did it happen that First Lieutenant Pul- 
leine did not discover the Zulus sooner ?” 

Pieter gave a vivid description of what he had 
seen and heard on the day of Isandula, and the 
Corporal listened with close attention and visi- 
ble pleasure. He laughed and stroked his beard 
when Pieter said that he had seen the Zulus 
spying about long before the attack, while the 
English had not noticed them, and when he told 
how the English commander had scorned his 
advice to arrange the wagons Boer fashion. 
Then he informed the boy that he had heard 
that several communities of Boers, among them 
that of Baas van der Goot, had recently moved 
to the vicinity of Lydenburg, where they traded 
with the gold diggers and diamond washers, 
and, apparently, had made much money. A 
party was going to Lydenburg on the morrow, 
which Pieter could join. 

As he left the house, Pieter noticed that the 
streets were crowded with people, all going in 
the same direction, and, on inquiry, learned that 
they were going out to the English camp to see 
a new regiment that had just arrived. 

As he passed along a residence street, Pieter 
noticed two gentlemen and two ladies ride away 


170 


THE BOER BOY 


from tlie yard of a handsome house. One 
of them, he was sure, was the father of the 
pretty girl he had met the night before. Yes, 
he was not mistaken, for there at the window 
stood the pretty girl herself, with anything but 
a happy expression on her face. 

“ You look very sad,” said he, after he had 
greeted her. 

The young lady smiled. “ Yes, Mr. Buur- 
man. Have you not yet learned that one can- 
not always be happy ?” 

“ Yes, indeed,” replied Pieter in his simple- 
hearted fashion. “ And when I see that you are 
not happy, I am sad, too.” 

“ It is very nice of you to be so sympathetic,” 
said the young lady, with a charming glance of 
her brown eyes. 

“ What has occurred to trouble you ?” asked 
Pieter. 

“ Nothing important ; but I wanted to go out 
riding and my father, out of politeness, had to 
give my horse to my aunt.” 

“ Is that all ?” asked the boy. “ Then if you 
have a saddle, you shall have a horse.” 

He hurried back for Jager, and when he re- 
turned the young lady was on the steps in her 


PIETER MARITz’s ENLISTMENT 171 

habit. “ What a beautiful horse !” she cried as 
he swung her into the saddle. “ But how thought- 
less I am ! Now you cannot ride !” 

“ I did not intend to,” he said. But when he 
looked after her his face became as sad as hers 
had been. Bide he must now, so he hurried 
back to the hotel to try to get a horse. There 
was but one there, however, a brown horse that 
would suffer no one to mount it. 

Pieter caressed the horse and asked to be al- 
lowed to try it, since he greatly desired to see 
the English. 

The animal allowed himself to be saddled, 
but no sooner had Pieter sprung on his back 
than he reared, turned in a circle, and struck 
out behind with all his strength. 

Pieter observed that it would be no trifle, not 
only to keep the horse in the road, but even to 
remain in the saddle. But he did not despair. 
Once in the street, he managed to keep his head 
in the right direction, and on the country road 
it did not so much matter if he occasionally got 
too near the field. So skillfully did he guide 
him with his knees that it seemed that he would 
soon become accustomed to the rider and obey 
the reins. 


172 


THE BOER BOY 


But when they approached the cloud of dust 
that indicated the crowd from the city, a burst 
of martial music rose from the regiment, invisi- 
ble in the dust. The horse became utterly un- 
manageable ; he made a succession of leaps, 
kicked up his heels, and struck out so powerfully 
in every direction that Pieter saw that he must 
not remain here. If he could ride in advance 
of the regiment and the crowd to the English 
camp, he might quiet the horse and see some- 
thing of the procession, after all. lie turned 
the horse in the direction of the camp and the 
animal dashed along the road, head up, with 
great leaps, in one of which his rider’s hat fell 
from his head. 

Pieter looked sadly after his beautiful new 
hat, when, to his astonishment, the young lady 
came riding swiftly behind him on Jager, and 
with wonderful skill bent over, in full career, 
picked up the hat and followed its owner. Just 
before they reached the camp she overtook 
Pieter, gave him the hat with a charming smile, 
and rode away. 

But alas ! he had more eyes for the young lady 
than for the direction in which he was going, 
and the next instant he found that he had come 


PIETER MARITZ’S ENLISTMENT 173 

too near tlie tents. The horse’s kicks against a 
tent were answered by loud voices from within, 
and the terrified inmates rushed out. 

“ Sacre nom d’une pipe ! Que vous emballe !” 
cried a half-angry, half-laugliing voice, and 
Pieter saw before him a little, broad-shouldered 
man in the uniform of a second lieutenant, with 
gray mustache and whiskers and an immense 
scar on his face, who threatened him with a re- 
volver, at the same time keeping carefully out of 
the horse’s way. The horse seemed to consider 
it a personal injury that the tent still stood, and 
continued to strike at it while the lieutenant 
threatened Pieter. They were interrupted by 
the arrival of a group of cavalry officers, among 
them Lord Fitzherbert, who asked Pieter to dis- 
mount, promising to give him one of his horses 
and to send the brown horse back to the city 
while he stayed to dine with him. 

Lord Fitzherbert was rejoiced to have the 
friend of his captivity with him once more, and 
explained to him that the second lieutenant 
whose tent he had destroyed was a Frenchman, 
who during the last thirty years had taken 
part in campaigns in France, Mexico, Algiers, 
Italy, Crimea, and China, and at last in the war 


174 


THE BOER BOY 


with Germany, when, in vexation at his coun- 
try’s defeat, he had entered the English army. 

“ Just your luck,” he added, “ to get into a 
quarrel with the most dangerous man in the 
whole army the minute you entered the camp. 
I wonder that he did not shoot you. We must 
try to appease him. I will invite him to dinner. 
He is an amusing fellow, with a store of stories 
from every country, speaks many languages, and 
can fight like one possessed.” 

As the young people rode to meet the regi- 
ment Pieter noticed that one side of the English 
camp was built like a fort, with earth walls and 
moats and subterranean powder magazines. 
Cannon stood on the walls pointing directly at 
the market place of Pretoria. The English 
had thoughtfully placed the fort so that its guns 
commanded not only the entrance to the camp, 
but also governed the capital of Pretoria. 

Pieter was surprised at the elegance and lux- 
ury of Lord Fitzherbert’s tent, which they 
first visited. In the dining tent about forty 
officers in splendid uniforms were grouped about 
a table decorated with silver, porcelain, and 
sparkling glass. They welcomed Lord Fitz- 
herbert’s companion in captivity kindly, and 


PIETER MARITz’s ENLISTMENT 175 

the little Frenchman shook hands with Pieter 
and assured him that it was a fortunate thing 
that Lord Fitzherbert came up when he did or 
he would certainly have shot him. 

When they sat down at the table, one of the 
officers said that the fifth part of the Zulu army 
had been lost at Isandula, and that Cetewayo, in 
terror at his loss, had asked the bishop of the 
Norwegian mission to intercede for him. He 
would accept the conditions of peace, and had 
already sent a present to Lord Chelmsford. 
Another said that, after the defeat at Isandula, 
the English would not accept peace, but would 
destroy the whole Zulu power. “ I know Cete- 
wayo, said Lord Fitzherbert, “ and I know lie 
would never sue for peace. Do you think he 
would yield after he has got us in the position 
we are ? He has destroyed a third of Colonel 
Glyn’s force ; Colonel Wood has to remain at 
Luneberg and cannot venture over the border ; 
and Colonel Pearson is besieged at Ekowe. If 
Cetewayo knew the real state of affairs he would 
lead his entire army across the Buffalo, and 
could march through all Natal without our be- 
ing able to hinder him. ,, 

“ Lord Fitzherbert is right,” said one of the 


170 


THE BOER BOY 


older officers. “ Until reinforcements come, we 
can do nothing.” 

Pieter enjoyed the excellent dinner and the 
conversation of the officers, but he did not once 
forget his instructions, and listened attentively 
to the conversation between Lord Fitzlierbert 
and Lieutenant Dubois. He was attracted to 
the Frenchman at once ; there was something so 
martial and so adventurous in his black eyes 
and round brown face. Dubois remarked that 
the war with the Zulus had already shown the 
English that they did not have enough cavalry, 
and that he had just received a commission to 
form a division of light cavalry, several of 
which were to be made up for scouting and picket 
duty. They hoped to enlist Boers in the 
Transvaal, the Orange Free State, and Natal 
for this service. Several officers had been com- 
missioned to recruit such troops, which were 
then to be united into squadrons under higher 
officers. 

“ Can you make use of me ?” asked Pieter. 

Lord Fitzherbert looked at him astonished, 
and the Frenchman’s face expressed his 
delight. 

“ Capital ! capital !” cried he, stretching out 


PIETER MARITz’s ENLISTMENT 177 

his hand to the boy. “Accept you ! You shall 
lead a compan}^ of cavalry, provided we get one. 
How old are you ? You must be eighteen.” 

“ I am going on sixteen,” replied Pieter, not 
daring, in his eagerness to lead a company, to 
say how recently he had passed his fifteenth 
birthday. 

“Sixteen!” cried the Frenchman. “Well, 
no matter ; capability counts, not years.” 

Lord Fitzherbert congratulated Lieutenant 
Dubois. “ You have made an excellent catch, 
Dubois,” said he. “ He is a valuable fellow. 
But are you in earnest, Pieter ? Do you really 
want to go ? If not, Lieutenant Dubois shall 
release you.” 

“ No, no !” cried Pieter. “ I am in earnest. 
I am anxious to learn the art of war from so 
excellent and experienced a teacher as Lieu- 
tenant Dubois.” 

“ My faith !” cried the flattered Frenchman. 
“ You who have smelt powder atlsandula know 
it already. I am the fortunate one.” 

It was now agreed that Pieter should go 
north to find his family, and return as soon as 
possible to take his place in the commando of 
Lieutenant Dubois. 


12 


CHAPTER XVII 


IN THE ENGLISH SERVICE 

The next morning Pieter Maritz went out to 
the camp, renewed his contract with Lieutenant 
Dubois, and said good-by to him and Lord Fitz- 
herbert. As he rode away he thought over his 
new position in the world. Soon he would be in 
English pay, going against the Zulus. He would 
receive thirty pounds a month, and, if he lived 
to return home after the war, he could take a 
large sum of money home to his mother. Then, 
as a light horseman, he could carry out Joubert’s 
plan in excellent fashion and render his father- 
land a great service. 

His next duty was to visit the stores and 
purchase gifts for his mother and brothers and 
sisters ; this done, he was ready, the next day, to 
join the little party of twenty, all men on 
horseback, who were going to Lydenburg. 

178 


IN THE ENGLISH SERVICE 


179 


At Lydenburg, which, like other Transvaal 
cities, had wide streets and pleasant gardens 
about the houses, they found a crowd of stran- 
gers, adventurers brought there in part by the 
gold-digging in the north, in part by the war. 
Pieter hastened to inform himself concerning 
his community, and learned that they were 
about four miles north of the city. 

As he rode out of their camp on the first day 
of February, he beguiled the time by picturing 
to himself how his brothers and sisters 
would look. He himself had grown half a head 
in the last year, and his stirrup-straps lacked 
only two holes of being as long as his father had 
worn them. He was, moreover, a cavalry soldier 
in the English service — nay, more, a man of the 
position and dignity of a subaltern, since he 
would lead a company. What would they think 
of that in the community? What would all his 
old comrades whom he had left as a boy say, at 
seeing him again as a man ? 

When, just at noon, he saw rising from a 
pretty green valley the smoke of several huts 
and campfires, and many wagons standing in a 
circle, he swung his hat in the air and gave a 
loud shout. After a few minutes’ ride he recog- 


180 


THE BOER BOY 


nized familiar faces — elderly men with gray 
beards, who sat in the shadow of the trees and 
were served with mush and goat’s flesh by the 
black servants. Baas van der Goot was in their 
midst, and liis Uncle Klaas sat near him. 

At first they scarcely knew him, and when 
they realized that he was their own Pieter 
Maritz Buurman, whom they had given up for 
lost, they surrounded him with the greatest 
curiosity. Baas van der Goot had almost for- 
gotten the incident of the Zulus, and when he 
heard the message from the celebrated Joubert 
he was so flattered that he looked with very 
kindly eyes on the bearer of the message. 

Pieter tore himself away from his questioners 
and hurried toward the hut which his uncle 
had pointed out to him as his mother’s abode. 

Several of his brothers and sisters were play- 
ing outside. He stepped on the threshold, and 
there sat his mother within, with two of his 
sisters. She looked up, astonished, her face 
grew pale, but the next moment Pieter was on 
his knees beside her, embracing her, and their 
tears of joy mingled. 

After his departure his mother’s lot had been 
a hard one. She had led the ox-wagon, and 


IN THE ENGLISH SERVICE 181 

had often sat in the saddle to watch the herd. 
But now she had her own home and traded in 
cattle, as did the whole community, which car- 
ried on a lively trade in cattle, corn and fodder 
in the northern mining districts, so that she had 
now a comfortable income. 

Full of astonishment and pride, she looked at 
her hoy, long mourned as dead, and when he 
went to his bag and brought forth his presents 
the children were speechless from joy. 

That evening Pieter was honored by a visit 
from Baas van der Goot, who came to invite 
him to sit with' the elders. It was a proud mo- 
ment for Pieter when he sat with the elders of 
the community about the campfire while the 
pipes were smoked. Here he must tell his ex- 
periences. But his enlistment with the English 
displeased them. 

“ Uncle, ” said he to Baas van der Goot, “I 
have talked over this thing with Field Corporal 
Joubert, and he has approved of it.” 

Baas smiled thoughtfully for a few moments. 
Then he said : “ If Joubert has approved of it, 
it must certainly be all right. I hope, however, 
that you will be with us when we set up the 
vier-klor and drive the English from our land.” 


182 


THE BOER BOY 


“I shall be with you then, God willing,” re- 
plied Pieter. 

After a week of the pleasant life of the com- 
munity he bade his mother farewell and returned 
to Corporal Joubert for the promised letters of 
recommendation. With Joubert he found a 
celebrated leader of the Boers, named Smit, 
and from them Pieter learned that Cape Colony 
had asked help from the Boers against Cete- 
wayo, but that the Transvaal Government had 
refused it. “ Not until England recognizes our 
independence will we come to her aid,” said Mr. 
Smit. “ They are friendly to us now because 
they are afraid of Cetewayo ; but if we were so 
foolish as to help them without reliable security, 
we would soon learn what the victory signified 
to us. No, the independence of our country 
must be our highest aim ; on that we will stake 
property and blood.” 

Next morning Pieter rode out to the camp 
and found Lieutenant Dubois very busy. The 
excitable Frenchman was all enthusiasm over his 
new duty, and had already enlisted about fifty 
men of different ages — some young, some with 
gray beards — all Boers, mounted for the most 
part on small, strong, swift horses. The Lieu- 


IN THE ENGLISH SERVICE 


183 


tenant sat on a handsome liorse and talked to 
them rapidly in a language which none under- 
stood, because it was composed of French, Eng- 
lish, Dutch, and other languages. He welcomed 
Pieter, and immediately commissioned him to 
explain to the men what he was saying. 

His orders were that the volunteers should, 
on the following day, march to Durban, where 
they would be formed into larger corps, with 
other volunteers. Pieter translated the speech 
and immediately became a kind of adjutant of 
the Lieutenant, who had heard much of him 
from Lord Fitzherbert, and who was also well 
pleased with the way in which the boy con- 
ducted himself. 

The camp was very much changed, and many 
of the soldiers were gone. One part of the 
troops had gone to Sir Evelyn Wood, the other 
to Lord Chelmsford. Two strong lines were 
formed, one on the border of Transvaal, the other 
at the Tugela River. 

Lieutenant Dubois continually stopped along 
the way to recruit, but it was not easy to find 
volunteers; the English had already pressed 
into service all who cared to go, and most of 
the Boers hated the English too much to take 


184 


THE BOER BOY 


service with them. In this work Pieter’s 
knowledge of the country and people proved 
of great service. 

The route led along the English front, past 
Helpmakaar, Graytown, and Pietermaritzburg to 
Durban, and Pieter was amused on the way to 
see how much respect the English had acquired 
for the Zulus. At Pietermaritzburg he saw a 
railroad for the first time — the line which runs 
to Port Natal. At Helpmakaar lay Colonel 
Glyn’s detachment, that had lost its baggage at 
Isandula, and the men were working in the 
trenches in wonderful costumes — half Kafir, 
half Boer. Here at Helpmakaar, which was 
transformed into a fortress, an attack was mo- 
mentarily expected, because of its proximity to 
the Zulu enemy. 

Lieutenant Dubois’ company, now increased 
to one hundred and fifty men, at last arrived at 
Durban, the city on the celebrated harbor of 
Port Natal, where the British troops were 
landed. 

Pieter’s heart beat more rapidly as he stood on 
a hill in the harbor and looked for the first time 
on the blue waters of the Indian Ocean. Ships 
were riding in the harbor, and soldiers were 


IN THE ENGLISH SERVICE 


185 


landing from a transport. The new soldiers 
were needed. On the way to Durban they had 
heard of the loss of a part of the Eightieth 
Regiment, under Captain Moriarity of Colonel 
Wood’s division, and there had been other 
defeats. Lord Chelmsford was awaiting rein- 
forcement to relieve Colonel Pearson, who had 
been shut up for six weeks in Fort Ekowe. 

Durban was very interesting to Pieter, be- 
cause it was so different from the Transvaal 
cities, its houses all being set close together. 
The streets were crowded, and he was especially 
attracted by the many Malays, the men with 
bright shawls crossed over their breasts, the 
women in full, airy white gowns, their blue-black 
hair wound in a great coil through which was 
thrust a silver arrow. Carriages, English cav- 
alry, dragoons, Uhlans, light horse, rode through 
the confusion of the streets, and many Kafirs 
ran about, crying their wares. It was a gay 
confusion of different sights, faces, garments, 
such as Pieter had never seen before. 

After he had reported to Major Walker, ac- 
cording to Lieutenant Dubois’ orders, and had 
been informed that in a few days Lord Chelms- 
ford would break camp and go to the relief of 


186 


THE BOER BOY 


Colonel Pearson, Pieter wandered through the 
camp, entertaining himself with the sight of 
the different uniforms and garments. He came 
finally to a place where the English tents gave 
place to the familiar forms of Kafir huts and 
all the smells and sounds of a Kafir community. 
Many hundred Kafir warriors camped here, and 
Pieter saw also the familiar ox shields and as- 
sagais of the Zulus of Natal, who had a large 
contingent for battle against their kinsmen. 

As he wandered among the huts his eyes fell 
on a form that seemed familiar. Leaning on his 
spear stood a man of proud carriage, his head 
inclined, his left foot advanced before the right. 

Pieter stepped nearer, and at the sound of his 
step the man turned. It was Humbati. His 
face grew dark when he saw the Boer boy, and 
he turned away as though he would say that 
their friendship belonged to other days. 


CHAPTER XVIII 


THE ADVANCE OF THE ZULUS 

Lord Chelmsford marched north toward 
the enemy from his fortified position on the 
Tugela, but this time he had learned caution, and 
marched with wagons protected, and with spies 
in advance to warn them of the coming of 
the fleet-footed enemy. Here the light horse 
rendered great service, and especially the volun- 
teer Boers, since their eyes were better, their 
horses more serviceable, and their knowledge of 
the country most valuable. They could travel 
over ten to fifteen German miles a day, and 
their watchful eyes surrounded the English 
army on all sides day and night. 

On March 29th they passed the night at the 
Kraal Inyoni ; on the 30th they came to the 
Kraal Amatikulo, on the Amatikulo River, 
both kraals deserted, though single Zulus had 
been discovered spying on the army from among 

187 


188 


THE BOER BOY 


the tall grass. On the 1st of April they left 
Amatikulo, crossed the river, and took the road 
to the east. 

At about five miles from Fort Ekowe, Lord 
Chelmsford stopped and communicated with 
Colonel Pearson by means of the heliograph. 
Pieter, who stood by, saw the commander-in- 
chief closely for the first time. The expression 
of his slender face was not energetic, and his 
eyes were sad. He called up Humbati and 
talked to him for a few moments, then turned to 
one of his officers. 

“ Colonel Pearson says that at least thirty-five 
thousand Zulus are in the neighborhood, and 
this Induna thinks the number is not exag- 
gerated. A pretty pickle Sir Bartle Frere lias 
got us into,” he continued, sighing. “ With the 
tenth part of the cost in money we could have 
settled this affair peaceably. Every conquered 
Zulu, as it is, costs England three hundred 
pounds, and the worst of it is that when it is 
conquered, the country will be worse off than 
it was before.” 

As lie turned away to give the signal to ad- 
vance, an officer, bearing a dispatch from Colo- 
nel Wood, dashed up at full gallop. 


THE ADVANCE OF THE ZULUS 


189 


“ Colonel Wood had a severe battle on the 
twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth, but was vic- 
torious. But on the first day he lost twelve 
officers and eighty-six men, and on the second, 
many more. Oh, these Zulus !” 

As the General spoke these words, Pieter saw 
Humbati standing near by, unspeakable pride 
illuminating his dark face. But his expression 
touched the boy’s heart, for he read in it not 
only high pride but a deep grief, and he thought 
he could understand something of the torture 
the traitor suffered, who wished to revenge his 
brother’s death on the tyrant, yet could not 
destroy his love for his fatherland. 

Lord Chelmsford immediately returned to 
the camp and hastened to make it as strong as 
possible. It was in the form of an immense 
square, large enough for the troops and the 
thousands of oxen that had drawn the wagons 
and guns. Banks, and occasionally walls and 
ditches, surrounded the four sides ; thorn bushes 
filled all the holes save the openings left for 
the guns, cannon, mortar guns, and the fearful 
mitrailleuse. One side was fortified only by the 
heavy wagons, in order that cavalry might 
break through when necessary. 


190 


THE BOER BOY 


The camp was carefully arranged with in- 
fantry, cavalry, sailors, and Zulus, the tents for 
the General and his staff in the open space in 
the centre. 

Near midnight Pieter arose and awoke the 
comrades who were to take with him a certain 
position in front of the camp, near the Inye- 
zane River, which formed a wide curve north 
and east of the camp, and two miles away emp- 
tied into the Indian Ocean. On the way he 
met Lieutenant Dubois and his patrol, who in- 
formed him that they had seen nothing sus- 
picious. Pieter relieved the buckets on duty 
with his own men, and himself remained with 
one of the men in the middle of the row and in 
front of the camp. 

It was very still, even the horse’s step being 
almost inaudible in the high grass. There was 
a blue-gray haze over the narrow, shallow river, 
dimly lighted by the stars. 

At midnight the weather changed. Clouds 
gathered in the sky, the thunder rolled in the 
distance, and a heavy stprm broke over the 
camp. When it ceased, the earth was soaked, 
and the river roared and foamed over its banks 
into the little plain on which rode the pickets. 


THE ADVANCE OF THE ZULUS 


191 


As Pieter waited for the sunrise, shiver- 
ing in his wet garments, he fancied he saw a 
dark object moving in the water. It was difficult 
to distinguish it in the twilight among the 
bushes, and he pushed Jager through the reed 
grass to the very edge of the water and looked 
searcliingly at the objects floating in the stream. 
Suddenly he caught up his gun ; before him, 
still half in water, elbows supported on the flat 
bank, was a black form, assagai in right hand, 
shield in left, motionless at the unexpected sight 
of the gun-barrel leveled at his head. For a 
moment they remained thus, the Boer’s hand on 
the trigger. But something held him back. He 
had never shed human blood ; he could not now. 
So he called softly in the Zulu tongue, “ Go back, 
Zulu !” 

Sending the alarm to camp at once, Pieter 
rode along the river as day dawned to see from 
what points and in wliat number the Zulus 
were coming. Many were already visible, slip- 
ping along on the other side of the river, and a 
strong force was marching swiftly toward the 
right side of the camp. Although most of the 
pickets, had ridden back to the camp, Pieter 
remained concealed for a time near a thicket, 


192 


THE BOER BOY 


that lie might observe the approaching army as 
long as possible. 

The column was ten men broad. Rank 
upon rank they came, marching shoulder to 
shoulder, shield against shield, spear-points 
glistening in the sunlight. As they swam the 
river Pieter recognized the first company as the 
“ Blue Shields/’ with whom he had once gone 
elephant hunting. Turning in his saddle as he 
rode back, he recognized also the next regiment. 
But he dared wait no longer ; he was the last 
picket outside the camp. 

As he galloped into camp he found all hushed 
in expectation of battle. Lord Chelmsford lis- 
tened attentively when Pieter told him that the 
flower of the Zulu army was approaching, in 
part the same troops that had been at Isandula. 

Now the army appeared stretched out like a 
bow, as if to surround the camp in front and on 
two sides. 

“ Half-past four o’clock,” said Lord Chelms- 
ford, watch in hand. “ Let us begin with 
shrapnel.” 

One gap after another was made in the ad- 
vancing host, as the thunder of the cannon 
made itself heard; but they quickly closed 


THE ADVANCE OF THE ZULUS 


193 


again, and the march continued in the midst of 
the fearful fire and quite without protection. 
Seeming to realize that the old manoeuver would 
not avail against the fortified camp, the Zulus 
placed their right wing opposite the English 
camp and held the left wing in reserve. Their 
balls, which had at first struck harmlessly 
against the wagon-covers, came more thickly as 
they advanced, and several English sank down, 
wounded. 

Suddenly a wind from the northwest lifted 
the smoke-veil, and Pieter looked out astonished. 
The attacking party of the Zulus was as broad 
as the English camp. In the middle was the 
“Regiment of the King,” on the right the 
“ White Shields,” on the left the “ Red Shields.” 
They advanced like a wall, shields before breasts, 
stabbing assagais in the right hand, the head 
feathers and white ox-tails on breasts and legs 
waving in the wind, the spotted headbands dis- 
tinctly visible above the wild faces. Without 
firing, they came up running, springing over the 
dead and wounded, undismayed by the shells 
that hissed and flamed in their midst. Shot 
after shot from the Remingtons pierced shield 
and breast, headband and head, but the wild 


13 


194 


THE BOER BOY 


shouting and the swift measure of the battle 
song never ceased. Now they were but two 
hundred paces away ; now the white teeth and 
rolling eyes could be seen distinctly ; the next 
minute the plain just before ditch and wall was 
filled with black forms. The English stood • 
firmly behind the breastwork, gun against gun, 
and the deadly fire of the breech-loaders com- 
pleted what neither shrapnel, nor shells, nor the 
balls of the Gatling gun were able to do. The 
grass was colored with blood and covered with 
corpses. Some heads appeared above the edge 
of the wall, but at once sank back. Even the 
Zulu ranks wavered under such fearful loss, the 
shrill cries ceased, the black crowd retreated, 
and the defenders of the cam]} breathed more 
freely. 

Then Pieter saw behind the fleeing Zulus 
Dabulamanzi on horseback, swinging his spear 
and trying to drive back the fugitives. Behind 
him came the reserve, which the shrewd prince 
led up to strengthen the attacking line. Scarcely 
had the shout with which the English had hailed 
the victory died on their lips when the second 
line rushed forward with the same force and 
rapidity. 


THE ADVANCE OF THE ZULUS 


195 


This time they fired as they advanced, and 
the English commander called on the Boer light 
horsemen to strengthen the English firing line. 
Pieter joined them, and under the deadly fire 
man after man fell in the Zulu line. 

As he fired, Pieter let his eyes run along the 
firing line and observed the difference between 
the fire of the English sharpshooters and that 
of the Boers. The English aimed only at the 
crowd, and incessantly fired and loaded, but the 
Boers aimed carefully at a certain enemy. The 
magazines of their guns spared them the con- 
tinued loading, and they combined accuracy and 
rapidity. They seldom took the weapon from 
their cheeks, and one shot followed another with 
deadly surety. 

Pieter was seized with the rage for battle 
which inflamed all hearts. All knew that they 
must either conquer or die. If their line weak- 
ened at a single point, not one of all the 
defenders of the camp would live to see the 
light of another day. So, regularly as machines, 
with burning eyes, faces and hands powder- 
blackened, they kept up their steady fire. 

Three sides of the camp were now attacked, 
and at all four corners the cannon and mitrail- 


196 


THE BOER BOY 


lease were working incessantly. Climbing over 
the bodies of the fallen, the Zulus crept up to 
the breastwork, and their tiger eyes looked into 
the camp ; they crept under the guns, but not 
one escaped alive. At last the English fire 
became too murderous for them, and again the 
Zulu ranks broke and retired. 

This time the wagon wall opened, and Hum- 
bati rushed forth with his black battalion, closely 
followed by the dragoons and the Boer light 
horsemen. The Zulus were in flight, but part 
of them collected and turned toward the enemy. 
Their art of fighting, however, was based alto- 
gether on attack ; they understood little of 
defense. 

Inspired with the lust for fighting, Pieter 
raced along, crying to Lord Fitzlierbert as he 
passed him, “ Adolphus ! A wager ! Who will 
first get Dabulamanzi’s gold headband ?” 

“ Forward ! Let’s after it !” cried Lord Fitz- 
herbert. 

Together with Lieutenant Dubois they gal- 
loped for the wager into the thickest of the 
fight, between the desperate Zulus and the cav- 
alry at the river’s brink. Pieter thought noth- 
ing of risking his life, but only of battle. 


THE ADVANCE OF THE ZULUS 


197 


Coolly lie parried the kirn blows and avoided 
assagais. Once an assagai struck his arm, but 
he did not drop the reins; encouraging Jager, 
he swung his sword against Dabulamanzi, strik- 
ing the assagai from his uplifted hand, and next 
moment piercing the prince’s breast. Dabu- 
lamanzi spread out his arms and sank back 
amidst a wild howl from the surrounding Zulus. 
Holding his sword in his teeth, Pieter rushed 
forward, tore the gold band from the woolly 
head, and swung it aloft triumphantly. 


CHAPTEB XIX 


THE DEATH OF PRINCE LOUIS NAPOLEON 

When the little company rode back to the 
English camp, the commander of the dragoons 
led Pieter up to Lord Chelmsford. 

“I recommend this young man to your especial 
notice/’ said he. “ He has shown himself brave 
and able. By his hand the Zulu leader fell, and 
this ring he took from his head in hand-to-hand 
conflict !” 

“ Is not this the young man who was a witness 
of the battle of Isandula ?” he inquired. 

Pieter bowed. 

“ But you are wounded,” he said, noticing the 
blood from the wounded arm. “ Dr. Johnson — 
but stay ; I will myself lay a plaster on the 
wound.” And so saying, he took from his own 
breast the Victoria cross and fastened it on 
Pieter’s blouse. 

198 


THE DEATH OF PRINCE NAPOLEON 199 

“ In the name of the Queen, 1 ” said he, “ I give 
you this badge of honor for military distinction. 
The ring I beg you to give me as a trophy. You 
shall receive threefold its weight in gold.” 
And while Pieter murmured his thanks, over- 
come by the honor, the officers crowded about 
to congratulate him and examine the head 
ring. 

Lord Chelmsford believed that the attack had 
not been made by* the entire Zulu force, but by 
only about twelve thousand. Since Colonel 
Pearson had signaled that a much larger force 
was in the vicinity, it was not improbable that 
other battles might occur near Ekowe. 

But this expectation was not fulfilled. The 
flying column sent by Lord Chelmsford to Fort 
Ekowe was not disturbed. The terror of their 
defeat and the fall of their leader had frightened 
away the Zulus, and only the traces of their 
camp were to be seen about Ekowe. 

The besieged men were overjoyed to see Lord 
Chelmsford’s force, for they were almost fam- 
ished, and could have held out but a few days 
longer. On the 22d of January, which had 
brought the news of Isandula, a strong Zulu 
force had fallen on Colonel Pearson, driven him 


200 


THE BOER BOY 


back into the fort, and had kept him besieged 
there ever since. 

It was impossible, however, to hold Fort 
Ekowe, as Lord Chelmsford had not enough 
provisions ; neither did he have a sufficient force 
to advance against the Zulus. Nothing re- 
mained but to return to the fort on the Tugela, 
there to pass week after week in inaction. 
Nothing, in the meantime, was heard of the 
Zulus. 

During this time, Pieter saw with astonish- 
ment rich England’s great preparations for the 
war. New troops continued to arrive, and 
many horses and mules. A regiment of Uhlans, 
in splendid uniform, marched into the Trans- 
vaal, where it was said the Boers were trouble- 
some, so that the Government deemed it advis- 
able to keep some troops there. The division 
along the Zulu frontier was strengthened by 
artillery and cavalry. Colonel Wood was made 
a brigadier-general, his column increased to 
more than three thousand men, and called a 
flying column. Other columns were likewise 
strengthened ; the one to which Pieter belonged, 
and which was commanded by General Crea- 
lock, numbered over nine thousand men. Lord 


THE DEATH OF PRINCE NAPOLEON 201 


Chelmsford tarried in the Transvaal, and it was 
said would attempt from there to enter Zulu- 
land. 

But in May the report was circulated in the 
camp at Tugela that the queen was dissatisfied 
with the administration of Sir Bartle Frere and 
with Lord Chelmsford’s conduct of the war, and 
had appointed her most fortunate general, Sir 
Garnet Wolseley, to the highest place in the 
civil government, and also to conduct the war 
in South Africa. 

The Boer light horse, which had been serving 
as pickets before Fort Tenedos, Fort Pearson, 
Fort Williamson, and Fort Chelmsford, where 
the English were continually expecting attacks 
from the Zulus, now received orders to march 
along the frontier of Natal to Transvaal. 
Pieter’s wound had now fully healed, and he 
had sat many nights in the saddle. The one 
hundred and sixty sovereigns he had received 
for the golden head ring he had left with a 
Boer in Durban, who had been recommended to 
him by Joubert. 

On May 20th the Boers, with other forces of 
dragoons, Uhlans, and artillery, were ordered 
to reconnoiter in Zululand to learn what a Zulu 


202 


THE BOER BOY 


force was doing that had shown itself about 
Isandula. The next day, when Pieter rode out 
before the Boer force beside Lieutenant Dubois, 
his attention was at once attracted by a young 
man who accompanied the general, mounted on 
a splendid chestnut horse. His face was pale 
and delicately cut, and he wore a small black 
moustache. His head was covered with the 
familiar English cork helmet, wrapped about 
with a white veil. 

At the same moment the young man’s eyes 
fell on Lieutenant Dubois, and, after a word to 
the general, he trotted up to the old Frenchman 
and spoke to him, smiling. 

“ A countryman, I hear,” said he. “ As soon 
as I saw you, I thought your face must have 
come from our dear old France.” 

“An old soldier, your Highness,” said Du- 
bois, bowing to his horse’s neck. “ For thirty- 
five years I served under the tri-color.” 

The young man grasped his hand. “ I am 
rejoiced to have found a countryman. So 
France’s sons meet in foreign lands during the 
misfortunes of their fatherland. I am with the 
English to learn the art of war. How happy 
would I be if God in his mercy would grant 


THE DEATH OF PRINCE NAPOLEON 203 


that faithful, deserving French officers might 
again be united under the only name that can 
provide them with proper recognition.” 

Pieter learned later that he was the young 
Prince Imperial of France, son of Napoleon 
III. 

The troops rode past the battlefield of Isan- 
dula, a mournful spectacle, with its heaps of 
bones and shattered wagons, on to the place 
where Lord Chelmsford’s forces had been at the 
time of the attack. The time for the march 
against Ulundi had now been set ; on May 24th 
Sir Garnet Wolseley had arrived at Port Natal, 
and the early part of June was set for the 
advance. 

On the morning of June 1st Pieter was 
doing picket duty before General Wood’s camp, 
not far from the Kraal Itelesi, on the frontier 
between Transvaal and Zululand. He could see 
far over the hilly country, dotted with deserted 
kraals, to the camp of General Newdigate. 

As he looked he saw distinctly a little group 
ride away from the camp, the Prince Louis Na- 
poleon in advance, an officer, six horsemen, and 
a Zulu guide. The prince paused on a hilltop, 
looked through his field glass, and wrote in a 


204 


THE BOER BOY 


notebook. Then they rode on and disappeared 
from sight. 

While Pieter was still on duty at his post, 
General Wood and Colonel Buller rode up. 

“ Have you seen the Prince Imperial ?” asked 
General Wood. 

“ Yes,” replied Pieter. “ He rode past me 
toward the enemy, with his escort, about three 
hours ago.” 

“ Three hours!” cried General Wood. Then 
turning to Colonel Buller, he said : “ I am 
worried about the prince. His zeal should be 
restrained. He knows neither the country nor 
the enemy. Plow easily one could be surprised 
on this ground ! If anything should happen to 
him, it would be an irredeemable shame to the 
British flag.” 

“ I will send some of my men out to find 
him,” replied Colonel Buller. “ Yet Lieutenant 
Carey, a reliable officer, is with him. But it is 
hard to watch over the prince — ” 

General Wood dropped his field glass. “ Is 
not that a rider coming ?” he cried. 

“ That is the officer I saw with the prince. I 
recognize his horse,” said Pieter. 

The lieutenant approached in a gallop, fol- 


THE DEATH OF PRINCE NAPOLEON 205 

lowed by four men, his horse dripping with 
sweat, liis face anxious, so excited that for a 
moment he could not speak. 

“The prince! Where is the prince?” cried 
General Wood. 

“We have lost him,” said the lieutenant, 
touching his hat. “ We rode out together, and 
the prince made topographical sketches. Then 
we came to a deserted kraal and the prince in- 
spected the huts. They were all empty, and we 
sat down to breakfast — ” 

“ What ! In the kraal itself?” 

“ Yes, the prince desired it. We unsaddled, 
and — ” 

“ You unsaddled ? In the kraal ? In the neigh- 
borhood of the enemy ?” 

“Yes, we unsaddled because the prince de- 
sired to rest his horse, and ate breakfast near a 
wall not far from the horses, which were held 
by two men. All at once I saw a black face 
between the thorn hedge, and pointed it out to 
the prince. We ran to the horses, and while I 
threw on my saddle and flung myself on my 
horse there were several shots and two men fell. 
The Zulus were so close behind us with their 
assagais that I saved myself only by the swiftest 


206 


THE BOER BOY 


gallop. When I came to a brook in the ravine 
and looked behind me, I saw only these four 
men. I saw nothing of the prince, and do not 
know what has become of him.” 

“We dare not ride after him,” said General 
Wood, “ without a strong division, for a large 
force of Zulus may be there. Besides, it is too 
late. Lieutenant Carey, you should have per- 
formed your duty better. You are under arrest, 
and shall be tried by court-martial. Give me 
your sword !” 

The following morning a division went out to 
seek the jmnce, with Lieutenant Dubois and the 
Boer light horsemen in advance. As they ap- 
proached the kraal where, according to Lieu- 
tenant ’ Carey’s description, the halt had been 
made, a riderless horse came trotting up, the 
prince’s chestnut, a revolver sticking in the sad- 
dle holsters, together with maps and writing 
materials. The stirrups hung down, but Dubois 
noticed that a leather strap that held the bag at 
the back of the saddle was torn and the bag 
gone. 

“ Does it not look,” said he, “ as if the prince 
had torn the strap away in mounting?” 

In the ravine to which they came next a sad 


THE DEATH OF PRINCE NAPOLEON 207 

sight met tlieir eyes. A naked corpse lay there, 
and, although it was covered with blood and the 
face greatly disfigured, they had no difficulty in 
recognizing the prince. He was pierced by 
eighteen assagai wounds, and stripped of every- 
thing save a small gold medallion. 

“ O miserable end of a renowned race !” 
cried the Frenchman, deeply moved, tearscours- 
ing down his scarred cheeks. “ O hope of 
France, must thou die thus, cut down by the 
spears of savages, thou heir of the proudest 
throne of the world? In thy veins flowed the 
blood of the greatest conquerors, thy grandsire 
shook the earth with the nod of his head, and 
thou, poor prince ! liest here, on African earth, 
fallen in a thicket, in an inglorious war !” 

“ Your fault is it that he fell!” he cried, as 
the English officers rode up. “ Could not you 
have protected him better ? He did your arms 
an honor when he allied himself with them, and 
you should have known how to protect a Napo- 
leon when he confided his youth to your guid- 
ance. On us falls the misfortune, but the 
blame lies with you.” 

The English officers did not reply, but par- 
doned his grief. Silent and sad, they stood near 


208 


THE BOER BOY 


the corpse, while Lieutenant Dubois kneeled 
down and kissed the hand of the dead prince. 

The body was placed on a shield and borne 
out of the ravine to an ambulance that had 
been hastily summoned. As the train ap- 
proached the tents it was met by all the high 
officers, the troops presented arms, and the 
funeral procession passed through the tent 
streets between long rows of sabres and bayonets 
under military honors. In the centre of the 
camp the wagon stopped and the shield was 
lifted out. Generals carried it, and Lieutenant 
Dubois took his place with them. The prince’s 
horse was led behind the shield. 

Quiet and the feeling of shame rested on the 
English camp. The fall of the prince was the 
bitterest blow added to the defeats and losses 
already suffered, for it carried with it the con- 
sciousness that all the nations of the earth con- 
templated with astonishment England’s manner 
of carrying on war. 


CHAPTER XX 


THE BATTLE OF ULUNDI 

Loud Chelmsford, now determining to gain 
a victory before Wolseley reached the army, at 
last undertook the advance toward Ulundi, with 
Xew digate and Wood from Transvaal and Gen- 
eral Crealock from Natal. The great army 
rolled like a broad river through the hill land, 
preceded by the watchful Boer light horsemen 
and Humbati’s troop. Before them lay a 
country wasted by fire, kindled by the retreat- 
ing Zulus. The progress was very slow, for the 
sudden changes of weather were very injurious 
to the English, too highly fed for great endur- 
ance. 

When Cetewayo became aware of the advance 
of the army, he sent an embassy with rich gifts 
to the English, offering to accept the former 
conditions of peace. It was refused, however, 

209 


210 


THE BOER BOY 


for the English knew that only a complete 
defeat of Cetewayo could set them right in the 
eyes of the world. 

Pieter Maritz, who had acted as interpreter 
for the Zulus, did not doubt that the English 
would eventually conquer, since they had every- 
thing in their favor, cavalry, the terrible artil- 
lery and engineers, whereas the Zulus had noth- 
ing but their courage, rapidity, their persever- 
ance and their ability to do without necessities. 
And the victory would strengthen England’s 
power in South Africa. He had learned, now, 
the English way of thinking and acting. They 
considered Africa their property and looked 
with scorn on the other people. 

To Cape Colony and Natal they had added 
the Orange Free State, Transvaal, and now 
Zululand, and, with their gold, hired the inhab- 
itants to fight one against another. Would the 
South African Republic succeed in freeing 
itself from this power ? 

It was a gaily attired army that marched 
toward Ulundi — the Boer light horsemen, Lons- 
dale’s Swazi troops, Cook’s light cavalry, the 
mounted Basutos and Humbati’s Zulu troops in 
advance. The Swazis and Zulus wore portions 


THE BATTLE OF ULUNDI 


211 


of cast-off uniforms of Uhlans, dragoons, hus- 
sars, and infantry, discarding trousers and shoes, 
however. On their black heads rested helmets, 
shakos, field caps, Boer hats, and cylinder hats 
with veils. The lowing of many thousand 
oxen, the clashing of the long whips, mingled 
with the melancholy song of the Highlanders 
and the Scottish Guard Fusileers. Mules from 
South America and horses from Germany, Hun- 
gary, and Russia pastured under the palms and 
euphorbia. The noise of the army frightened 
away lions and leopards and hyenas as though 
they were antelopes. 

On the 2d of July, Pieter, who rode in 
advance, saw Ulundi again, just as he had seen 
it a year ago in company with the missionary. 
There lay the broad valley, surrounded by 
heights, in which the black rings of the military 
kraals lay like garlands on a green carpet. Yet 
there was a difference, for to-day there were a 
number of Zulu outposts, looking like ants in 
the distance. It was evident that the king had 
determined to have a decisive battle before his 
capital city. 

On July 3d the army marched up to the river, 
placed a battery on the bank to protect the ford, 


212 


THE BOER BOY 


and sent over a detachment under Colonel 
Buller, which fell into ambush and escaped with 
difficulty. Pieter was among them, and when 
the signal for retreat was given he almost forgot 
to flee, so astonished was he at the figure he saw 
at the head of the Zulu band. There was no 
mistaking it — it was Dabulamanzi. 

On the next day, as Cetewayo had not ac- 
cepted the English demand for unconditional 
surrender, Lord Chelmsford ordered the troops 
to advance. Not an enemy was in sight to in- 
terrupt the passage across the river. 

As the battle must be fought in the open 
field, without protection, Lord Chelmsford formed 
his troops in a hollow square, the Eightieth 
Infantry Regiment and a battery of Gatling 
guns in front, infantry regiments on each side 
and at the back. Guns were placed at the four 
corners. The infantry was four rows deep, and 
the black battalions stood within the square. 
Six thousand men were led out, a reserve re- 
maining at the front. 

Before this square, which of necessity moved 
very slowly, the light horsemen were sent out 
to explore thoroughly every thicket and ravine, 
for fear of ambush. Pieter, familiar with the 


THE BATTLE OF ULUtfDI 


213 


region, rode far in advance, wondering where 
the Zulu regiments could be concealed. Think- 
ing he saw a movement near the Kraal Lickasi, 
a favorite place of Cetewayo, he ventured still 
farther and saw, at the foot of the hill of Lickasi, 
a Zulu force of about two thousand, standing 
motionless, the king before them. The same 
moment balls whistling about him told him that 
he, too, had been observed. 

When he returned to his people, he found 
the English square moving slowly along ; 
parallel with it, at a distance of scarcely two 
thousand paces on its right flank, marched a 
Zulu army likewise in a square, silent and slow, 
almost like a shadow of the English host. 

As he looked forth from a long, low thicket, 
suddenly appeared another Zulu host on the left 
flank of the English, but farther away, and now 
at last the third division appeared from Ulundi, 
marching toward the English front. 

Lord Chelmsford was astonished at the skillful 
manoeuvres of the Zulus, and guessing that they 
were waiting for a break in his line, stopped the 
square and awaited the attack. 

It was Gingilowo over again, save that no war 
song resounded from the Zulu ranks. To many 


214 


THE BOER BOY 


of the Europeans the silence was more dreadful 
than the war song, for it indicated the despair 
of brave men, who went to their last battle under 
the eyes of their king. 

Pieter noticed how the old regiments had 
shrunken. The Red, Blue, and Black Shields 
had suffered most, only four or five hundred 
men remaining in them. Prince Dabulamanzi, on 
a black horse, was everywhere to be seen; no 
shot could harm him, as, flying here and there 
over the field, he directed the battle. 

The Zulus mounted the little plateau on 
which Lord Chelmsford had taken his stand, 
and threw themselves against the guns to no 
avail. Their broken remnant finally retreated, 
made a desperate stand against the Uhlans, who 
were let out of the square to jmrsue them, and 
then fled, among the hurrahs of the army and 
the strains of “ Rule Britannia !” 

Pieter rode forward to Ulundi and saw that 
the English horsemen were already in the city. 
The outermost huts were empty. When he came 
to the king’s dwelling, he saw the beautiful 
grassy spot, where once the women had danced 
at the king’s feast, filled with Uhlans, while 
flames leaped up from the wide veranda. 


THE BATTLE OF ULUNDI 


215 


He rode slowly back, saddened at the sight of 
desolation and death, where once he had seen a 
happy people. Once more he looked back. The 
black smoke rose to the skies ; the light huts 
burned like torches. Cetewavo’s power was 
broken, and for the fall of his kingdom, for the 
burning of his capital city, the English musicians 
were playing “ Rule Britannia.” 


CHAPTEK XXI 


THE CAPTURE OF CETEWAYO 

Lord Chelmsford detailed a small force, 
principally cavalry, to the pursuit of Cete- 
wayo, who had disappeared immediately after 
the defeat. The Zulu princes, who began to 
flock in soon after the victory to swear alle- 
giance to the English, told him that the king, 
with six thousand men, had fled into the most 
distant and wildest portion of his kingdom. 

The Uhlans, the dragoons, the sharpshooters 
of the Sixtieth, the Boers, and Humbati’s troop 
hastened after this last little army, marching first 
to Mainze-kanze, where the treacherous Indunas 
reported that they had halted. 

One bright moonlight night, when the little 
force was several miles south of the junction of 
the Black and White Umvolosi, Pieter observed 
that Humbati hurried forward, followed bv 
216 


THE CAPTURE OF CETEWAYO 217 

Colonel Barrow, who motioned to Lieutenant 
Dubois and his Boers to accompany him. 
Humbati’s manner had remained unchanged 
since the victory. Although he was treated 
with much reverence by the surrendered I11- 
dunas, as the possible future ruler of the 
country, the unhappy man still remained silent 
and gloomy, as though impelled by revenge, 
and not ambition. 

They advanced laboriously through the nar- 
row valley, thickly set with rocks and trees, and 
arrived at an open space — a lonely, concealed 
spot, with a few palm trees and many huge rocks, 
in part overgrown with grass and vines. 

Here Humbati paused and whispered to 
the Colonel, who ordered some of the soldiers 
to dismount. The Zulu approached one of the 
heaps of stones, dislodged several, and presently 
disclosed a cave-like opening filled with shining 
articles, golden rings, metal vessels, bundles 
filled with ostrich feathers and costly stuffs. 
Humbati had betrayed the treasure-house of the 
king. 

While all eyes were fixed on the cave, a wild 
cry rang out and a dark form rushed down the 
hillside. At sight of the Zulus the English and 


218 


THE BOER BOY 


Boers instantly concealed themselves among the 
rocks. 

Pieter recognized the tall form as that of 
Dabulamanzi, who now flung himself in a frenzy 
on Humbati. The Induna stood before the 
treasure-house, disdainful of flight, awaiting his 
enemy. Both bore guns, but in this battle they 
cast aside the strange firearms and seized their 
assagais. Pieter read in Dabulamanzi’s look 
and gesture the pride and scorn of the ruler and 
the conqueror, determined to revenge his suffer- 
ing and rage over the defeat on this traitor, 
more hated than victorious England. Humbati, 
on his part, had never forgotten the injury and 
sorrow the king had caused him, his trusted 
friend, in robbing his brother of honor and dig- 
nity before the eyes of the whole court for a 
failure that was as much Dabulamanzi’s fault as 
his. Now he would take blood for blood from 
the king’s brother. 

Dabulamanzi plunged his assagai at his 
enemy’s breast, but the nimble Humbati evaded 
the blow and sprang forward with lightning-like 
rapidity with his own weapon, which pierced 
the heavy ox-liide and stripped off the skin. 
Now assagais were flung aside and the opponents 



IN A FRENZY HE FLUNG HIMSELF ON HIS ENEMY 













































































































































THE CAPTURE OF CETEWAYO 


219 


grappled. Their black skins shone in the moon- 
light, as now Dabulamanzi’s iron grip seemed 
to gain the upper hand and Humbati’s muscles 
to weaken. A powerful push of the prince, 
and Humbati fell to the ground, Dabulamanzi 
with him. Now the contest continued on the 
grass, the two writhing about like serpents. 
Pieter could not tell which was the prince, 
which Humbati, so swiftly did they roll from 
side to side, now one on top, now the other, the 
faces being only for a second visible. Now he 
saw Dabulamanzi’s short hair and jn’oud eyes, 
now Humbati’s gloomy face, his eyes gleaming 
like a tiger’s, his white set teeth shining from 
his wild black face. Then Dabulamanzi sprang 
up. Humbati had struck his head on a stone 
and was unconscious. The prince seized his 
assagai, plunged it in his enemy’s heart, and fled 
with a howl of triumph, without molesting the 
whites. 

The next day at Mainze-kanze, the ambitious 
Dabulamanzi surrendered, with his army, and 
swore allegiance to the English, in the hope that 
his rule over Mainze-kanze and the surround- 
ing country might be recognized. 

In accordance with orders to send a smaller 


220 


THE BOEK BOY 


force in pursuit of Cetewayo, and to send back 
the remaining troops. to Port Natal, Lord Gifford 
went forward to the northeast with six hundred 
men, Boers, dragoons, and sharpshooters. It was 
now near the end of July. 

The wild, mountainous country made progress 
very difficult. The kraals were scattered, the 
country thinly jiopulated ; there was great 
danger from wild animals. They were con- 
tinually receiving tidings of Cetewayo’s where- 
abouts, but by the time they had reached the 
place he had flown. On these long rides and 
midnight watches Pieter rode often with Lord 
Fitzherbert, and the two renewed their old 
friendship. They had together, one day, a bit 
of luck. Returning from a hunt, they overtook 
and captured some Zulus, one of whom proved 
to be the king’s physician, whom they had 
known at Ulundi. 

The men were not unwilling to save their 
lives and property by surrendering, and the 
physician was easily bribed to tell that the king, 
whose flight had been continually retarded by 
attacks of melancholy and shortness of breath, 
was now in the Negowe wood, in Molihabant- 
schi’s kraal. 


THE CAPTURE OF CETEWAYO 


221 


At sunset, Colonel Clark, with three hundred 
men and a crowd of Zulus, set out, dividing his 
force into four small divisions that were to sur- 
round the kraal. The strongest of these divi- 
sions was commanded by Major Marter, and in 
it were Pieter and Lord Fitzherbert. 

The whole night they marched, the country 
becoming wilder and rougher as they advanced. 
Mountains and valleys alternated continually, 
and deep ravines, dense prickly thickets, and 
little water courses made riding very difficult. 
The roar of wild beasts and the cries of the 
baboons were incessant. At daybreak, at a 
signal from the treacherous physician, they 
halted at the edge of the forest. 

The rising sun illuminated a wild, moun- 
tainous landscape. Half a mile away rose a 
single barren peak in the midst of a chain of 
mountains, surrounded by deep ravines, and 
on its yellow-green summit the black huts 
of Molihabantschi’s kraal were distinctly 
visible. 

Much caution was necessary, as the ground 
was impassable for horses and favorable to 
secret flight. After some indecision, Major 
Marter decided to go as quietly as possible to 


222 


THE BOER BOY 


the strip of forest back of the kraal, arid from 
there to slip up to the huts. 

As they mounted the hill, Pieter saw the 
king standing before his hut, in a little circle 
of his followers. The Zulus, who ran in advance 
of the white men, cried out, “ The white man 
comes! You are caught !” 

Cetewayo paid no attention to them, but stood 
motionless until the white men came nearer. 
Then he turned and went within the hut. 

Major Marter dismounted and called in aloud 
voice for the king to come out. For a time he 
refused, then crept out of the low door and 
stood proudly before his captors. When one of 
the dragoons attempted to lay hands on him, he 
shook him off scornfully, saying, “ White war- 
rior, do not touch me !” Then, turning to 
Pieter, who acted as interpreter, he said, quietly, 
“Tell the soldiers of the English queen that 
they may shoot me.” 

Major Marter explained that they did not 
wish to do him injury, but merely desired him 
to accompany them. 

“What is the man’s rank ? Is he an Indu- 
na ?” inquired Cetewayo. 

Lord Gifford now appeared and the hill was 


THE CAPTURE OF CETEWAYO 223 

soon covered with soldiers, who wondered at 
the king’s proud demeanor. When he and his 
followers left the ' kraal, the sharpshooters and 
dragoons formed the lines through which he 
passed with slow step, his head erect, looking 
with hard, searching glances at the English 
soldiers, as if he were reviewing his own war- 
riors. 

The king was first taken to the English camp 
at Ulundi, where Pieter saw for the first time 
the shrewd face of the new commander-in-chief, 
Sir Garnet Wolseley, accompanied by the chief 
of his staff, Sir George Pomeroy Colley. 
Wolseley was arranging the affairs of Zululand, 
and receiving the allegiance of the Indunas and 
all of their weapons of European fashion. He 
was preparing to divide the country into small 
principalities. 

By his command, Cetewayo, in company with 
a dozen of his favorite wives and some servants, 
was sent to Port Durnford, in Natal, and thence 
by sea to Cape Town. His Indunas together 
with Sirajo and Molihabantschi remained be- 
hind in Zululand. 

Pieter rode with the escort of dragoons that 
accompanied the king to Port Durnford. When 


224 


THE BOER BOY 


the giant black figure crossed the gangplank to 
the ship Pieter looked liis last on the great 
tyrant. 

With the war, Pieter’s mission was ended. 
As he stood looking into the foaming water, he 
thought of the past and the future. So far, his 
fate had been strangely entangled with the 
English, and something told him that the end 
was not yet. 


CHAPTER XXII 


FROM PRETORIA TO KIMBERLEY 

In the year that elapsed since the close of the 
Zulu war, Pieter had grown to be a tall, strong 
youth, in his eighteenth year. 

On his return from Zululand, he had proved 
of inestimable service to President Kruger in 
the affairs of the republic, in riding through 
the State preparing the Boers for an uprising, 
which, in despair at the English disregard for 
their rights, they had at last determined on. 
It was now December, and Pieter had attended 
a meeting of Boers, not far from Pretoria, six 
hundred men, many of them from communities 
in the far north, who had camped there to hear 
President Kruger’s proclamation. 

These men were of very different age and 
appearance, some gray, with unshorn hair and 
beard, others young and slender and carefully 
dressed, but all were very tall and splendidly 
15 225 


226 


THE BOER BOY 


built, their carriage expressing self-confidence 
and firmness. As lie looked at them, Pieter felt 
renewed confidence in the future of his country. 
At this meeting he was commissioned by Presi- 
dent Kruger to go into the Orange Free State, 
whose President, Brand, had, so far, refused to 
assist the Transvaal, and endeavor to induce its 
inhabitants to take an active part in the coming 
conflict between Boers and English. 

That day, as Pieter rode from Pretoria to the 
south full of pride in the confidence reposed in 
him by the best men of his fatherland, and sure 
of his jieople’s future, he saw, while but a mile 
from Heidelberg, the glitter of weapons in the 
distance and the uniform of English dragoons. 
He thought at first to turn aside, but reflecting 
that that would only excite suspicion, whereas 
peace still ruled, and the papers he carried were 
not incriminating, he rode on to come face to 
face with Lord Fitzherbert at the head of a body 
of dragoons. 

Although a year had passed since they parted, 
the young Englishman’s face expressed anything 
but pleasure at the sight of his friend. At his 
nod, a sergeant rode forward and seized Jager’s 
reins. 


FROM PRETORIA TO KIMBERLEY 227 

“ You are my prisoner,” cried Lord Fitzher- 
bert. “ Sergeant, take his weapon.” 

Motioning the astonished boy to ride for- 
ward with him out of hearing of the men, he 
spoke : 

“ Ah, Pieter, my dear friend, how unhappy I 
am to have met you ! If I had only known it I 
would have taken another road. To think, after 
the days that we have ridden and fought 
together, that I must become the tool of your 
misfortune !” 

“ But why ?” asked Pieter. “ Why have you 
taken me prisoner ? Are not we at peace ? Are 
not the roads free to every one ?” 

Lord Adolphus shook his head. “ You know 
as well as I what is going on. The English 
Government has learned that the Boers are pre- 
paring for an uprising, and I have here a list of 
names of those to be arrested for inciting the 
people to seditious acts. Among the names I 
find yours. I hope you have no incriminating 
papers to make it go the harder with you.” 

“ I do not know what the English would call 
incriminating papers,” replied Pieter. “ I have 
some printed proclamations that show the just 
claims of the South African Republic. We 


228 


THE BOER BOY 


desire nothing but the recognition of our treaty 
made with England thirty years ago.” 

“ Give me the papers,” said Lord Fitzherbert, 
sadly. “ How can you do this? You, who have 
fought with us, to lead a peasant revolt !” 

“I am proud to suffer for my fatherland,” 
said Pieter. “ I fought with you to learn the 
art of war. What I learned there I will turn 
to the service of my country.” 

Lord Adolphus tried in vain to convince his 
friend that the Boers could never conquer Eng- 
land ; then, promising that if Pieter was de- 
tained as a prisoner he would send his horse and 
weapons to the address the boy gave him, led 
him to headquarters at Heidelberg. 

Through the intercession of his friend, Pieter 
was more kindly treated than he would other- 
wise have been, but the papers and the news of 
activity among the Boers caused him to be de- 
tained and sent the next day, with another Boer, 
to Potschefstrom, where was Colonel Winslow. 

The journey was made in a little four-horse 
open vehicle, in which sat two policemen, who 
threatened the handcuffed prisoners with their 
revolvers if they attempted to escape. When 
they were alone together, Pieter lamented their 


FROM PRETORIA TO KIMBERLEY 229 


fate loudly and reproached himself for his im- 
prudence in running into the hands of the 
English. The other Boer, an older man, who 
had left home, wife, and children for his country, 
said little, but his face and bearing showed his 
determination to bear good or evil fortune with 
the same composure. 

Three days they traveled up-hill and down- 
hill through the mountainous land of southern 
Transvaal, the police being careful to stop only 
at little places where they were known, or with 
farmers who adhered to the English. For many 
of the Boers in southern Transvaal were of 
English blood and were either unfriendly or in- 
different to the ambitions and desires of the 
majority of the people. 

At Potschefstrom, the former capital of 
Transvaal, was a fort and a military garrison, 
where the prisoners were at once taken before 
Colonel Winslow. Pieter observed that great 
excitement pre vailed in the garrison. Mes- 
sengers and patrols were coming and goingcon- 
tinually. It was evident that although peace 
still prevailed, the report of the Boer uprising 
was having its effect on the lonely scattered 
posts. 


230 


THE BOER BOY 


Colonel Winslow was very severe with them. 
“ Do you know,” said lie, “that you are insur- 
rectionists? Make an open confession or I will 
have you shot to-morrow.” 

“You can shoot us,” replied Pieter, “hut 
it will be murder. England has broken her 
treaty with Transvaal, and her military j^osses- 
sion and annexation is an act of force. Shoot 
us if you dare. We are not afraid. Our blood 
will be avenged by our countrymen.” 

This Colonel Winslow well knew, and the 
threat was made only in the hope of extorting a 
confession. He talked aside with his officers 
for a time, and then told the prisoners that he 
would send them to the Governor-General at 
Cape Town. The next morning, in the same 
vehicle, with the same guards, they started along 
the frontier of the Orange Free State to the 
southwest. 

Eight long days and they crossed the frontier 
into Griqualand West and arrived at Kimberley. 
It was much larger than Potscliefstrom and 
Pretoria and made a very dismal impression 
on him, with its houses almost altogether covered 
with iron plate. As far as one could see, noth- 
ing met the eye but sand and iron. Some of 


FROM PRETORIA TO KIMBERLEY 


231 


the streets were narrow and crooked, others very 
wide; the houses mostly one story high and un- 
painted. There were many shops, and a num- 
ber of people were on the streets — white labor- 
ers and wretched-looking Kafirs. 

As the wagon rolled through the streets 
Pieter saw a strange sight — an immense gulf 
yawning in the midst of the city, so deep that 
the men at work in it looked like very small 
ants. From the edges of the pit many iron 
wires led down below, supported half way down 
by buttresses, and on these wires iron boxes 
ran up and down, carrying earth and stones. 
This hole was one of the Kimberley diamond 
mines. 

“ I once lived here,” said Pieter’s silent com- 
panion, “ but when the Englishmen came with 
their policy I trekked. They took everything 
away from us ; for, where anything is to be 
gained, the English arrive immediately. It has 
changed greatly since I left. 

“ The English annexed the land in 1868,” he 
continued, “ and in 1869 I left. At that time a 
word began to be used which drove many away 
— Idibi, from the initial letters of the words, 
illicit diamond buying. This word had a terrible 


232 


THE BOER BOY 


significance, because the English condemned all 
with whom diamonds were found, the names of 
which were not in the Government books, to 
from five to ten years’ compulsory labor.” 

“ But how could all the diamonds be found in 
the Government books ?” asked Pieter. 

“ This way : The Government divided all the 
land where there was 4 blue ground/ and dia- 
monds are found only in blue ground, into little 
claims, and the possessor had to work it with 
shovel and pick. It is hard work. The blue 
ground must be dug up and then worked and 
sieved until only the thousandth part remains. 
In this are the diamonds, and the possessor 
must show them to the court, where they are 
recorded and described. Thus, every diamond 
received its pedigree. But the Kafirs who 
work in the claims are unconscionable thieves. 
They are stripped when they come from work, 
and their clothes, hair, ears, and mouths exam- 
ined ; but the rascals steal many stones, anyway, 
which are quickly bought up, because they sell 
more cheaply and their buyers think they can 
slip through and get rich. One man, with seven 
pounds of diamonds, was caught on board ship 
at Cape Town. For that reason, Idibi has a 


FROM PRETORIA TO KIMEEIILEY 


233 


terrible sound in Kimberley. The English can 
rarely catch the thieves, so that they punish the 
illicit diamond buyers. 1 ” 

By this time the wagon had reached the jail, 
a two-story building with barred windows. It 
was an English prison, for Kimberley, with its 
large population of covetous, criminal people, 
of thieves and receivers of stolen goods, and all 
kinds of sharpers, needed a regular prison and 
a strong police system. 

Sadly Pieter entered the great building and 
heard the iron doors close after him. 


CHAPTER XXIII 


A GLOOMY FREEDOM 

The Boer boy, accustomed to the freedom of 
the wide plains, was very much depressed by his 
gloomy surroundings, and by the separation 
from his companion. He sat at his table, his 
head supported on his hands, wondering what 
would be his fate. The Boer uprising had by 
this time begun, and the incensed authorities at 
Cape Town would probably sentence him to 
death, a hateful death to one who was not afraid 
to die on the battlefield for his fatherland. 
Escape from the prison was impossible ; the 
floor and ceiling were of iron ; the walls, tile, 
the windows heavily barred. 

As he thought thus, on this gloomy Christmas 
Eve, he presently became conscious of a peculiar 
sound, now like the scratching of rusted iron, 
now like a dull knocking. It came from above ; 
what could it be ? 

234 


A GLOOMY FREEDOM 


235 


The building, lie had noticed, was two-story, 
and his room was on the upper floor. There 
might be a room in the roof, and the low, cautious 
manner of the knocking led him to think 
that a prisoner lived above him who was trying 
to get out. He kept very quiet, so that he 
might not disturb the worker. 

It was night, and the room was but dimly 
lighted by the stars and the new moon. All at 
once the noise stopped, to be succeeded presently 
by another noise, like the pushing of a heavy 
body, and immediately thereafter a form ap- 
peared in the room, dangling a moment from 
the ceiling, and then springing elastically to the 
floor. The man carried a kind of chisel in his 
mouth and a bundle over his shoulder. As he 
turned, Pieter recognized the cunning face of the 
Swazi Rainmaker whom he had known while a 
prisoner at Ulundi. 

The recognition was mutual, and the Rain- 
maker’s look of alarm at the sight of some one 
in the room changed to a smile as he gave a cry 
of astonishment. Then, hastily dressing himself 
from his bundle, he explained that he had been 
imprisoned for a long time for Idibi and wished 
to escape through the window. 


236 


THE BOEB BOY 


Hope awoke in Pieter’s breast, and together 
they turned to the window. The bars could be 
cut, but the guard walked below ! The Pain- 
maker crouched on the floor and sighed. 

The Rainmaker’s tool had been a bolt which 
he had sharpened on the window-sill, and with 
which he had broken through the iron roof- 
plates into Pieter’s room in the hope of escaping 
through its window by means of a rope made 
from his mattress covering. 

“ We can only get out on the roof from my 
room,” he said, “and the rope is too short to get 
down from it.” 

“ Let us see how high it is,” said Pieter. 
Climbing on the table, they managed to get up 
through the hole in the ceiling, and finally out 
on the roof. 

The roof was not very steep, but was slippery 
from the mist. It was iron, and some of its win- 
dows were flat, some set in gables. None of the 
neighboring roofs were close enough to spring 
to. The sky was alternately dark and clear as 
the clouds drifted over it. The diamond mine 
looked very strange from this distance, so 
brightly lighted that its width and depth could 
be clearly seen. 


A GLOOMY FREEDOM 


237 


The two sat on the edge of the roof and looked 
down, seeing no chance for escape, as the roof 
was too high, even had they been able to find a 
place to fasten the rope securely. 

At last they found a gable window without 
bars. Pieter tied the rope about the Rainmaker 
and let him down, but the room was so high 
that Pieter could not spring down without run- 
ning the risk of injuring himself. The Rain- 
maker disengaged himself from the rope and 
examined the room, presently reporting that he 
had found a door that could easily be broken 
open. Now Pieter undertook to fasten the rope 
so that he could let himself down. Finally he 
pushed the chisel with all his strength between 
two of the iron plates, intending to tie the rope 
to it. But as he pushed his foot slipped, and, 
to his terror, he felt himself sliding down the 
roof. He tried to hold fast with elbows and 
knees, not letting go of rope and chisel, but in 
vain. He slipped perhaps ten feet and went over 
the edge of the roof. 

As he saw himself, in his imagination, lying 
shattered on the ground, and pictured his weep- 
ing mother, he felt a severe jolt and found his 
elbows stayed by the gutter. His legs hung 


238 


THE BOER BOY 


over the edge of the roof, but the upper part of 
his body was still above the gutter and his arms 
had a resting place. Instinctively, he bent over, 
pressed with all his force on the gutter, and suc- 
ceeded, almost miraculously it seemed, in stop- 
ping the force of his fall. As he hung so, chisel 
and rope still in hand, by a powerful effort he 
succeeded in getting first one leg and then his 
whole body on the roof again. It then occurred 
to him that he might slide down the eaves- 
trough, but on going cautiously to the corner, 
he found the roof projected too much to make 
this possible. So he clambered back to the 
Rainmaker, who had heard him fall and had 
given him up for lost. 

This time he tore loose one of the sheets of 
iron, tied the rope to the nail and hammered it 
back again, and slid down safely into the room, 
chisel in hand. Inserting this in the door, with 
their united strength they soon succeeded in 
forcing the door open, and stood motionless for 
some minutes to see if the noise attracted atten- 
tion. As all remained quiet, they went out 
into the hall past several doors, and in spite of 
the darkness found the stairs and descended to 
the ground floor. Here they heard voices and 


A GLOOMY FREEDOM 


239 


saw lights in the room where the guards were 
entertaining themselves. Quietly they slipped 
past the door of this room and tried to open the 
front door. But there was no key to the lock, 
and it was useless to think of breaking open 
this heavy iron door, even had it not been out 
of the question because of the noise. They 
turned away and tried to find other means of 
exit, hut it was impossible. Everywhere were 
either strong walls or closely barred doors. 

“ Let us remain here,” said Pieter, “ until 
guards are changed, and then try to rush out in 
the crowd.” 

But the Rainmaker had not the courage to 
attempt resistance with armed guards, and Pieter 
himself recognized how desperate was such a 
plan. A thousand wild ideas suggested them- 
selves, each of which was scouted as impossible. 
Then, as the prison air was hateful to Pieter, he 
suggested that they return to the empty room, 
and, clambering up the rope, he crouched down 
on the window-sill, that he might at least have 
the open sky above him and the fresh air. 

All at once it seemed to him that something 
strange was happening at the mines. Lights 
collected in a certain place at the edge of the 


240 


THE BOER BOY 


abyss and continually increased in number. 
He called to the Rainmaker to come up and see 
what was the matter. 

“ The mi ne- workers are collecting,” said the 
Swazi. “They often become discontented be- 
cause they do not receive enough wages, and 
because they are searched when they come from 
the mines.” 

Now a heavy sound as of many voices could 
be heard in the distance, and suddenly there 
was a flash on the edge of the pit and the sound 
of a shot. Plainly there was a battle at the 
mines, and the overseers were trying to bring 
the workers to order. The prisoners on the 
roof watched the scene with eager attention. 
The lights became more distinct, and a great 
number of men marched from the mines through 
the streets by the light of torches. It could 
easily be seen that the number increased. 
Lights appeared in many windows, and many 
people came out of the houses and mixed with 
the crowd of mine- workers. 

Now there was the sound of voices in the 
prison. Pieter heard the guards call, and then 
the door opened and the voices were heard in 
the street. A little division of men went from 


A GLOOMY FREEDOM 


241 


the prison to assist the overseers against the 
miners. Louder and louder arose the tumult of 
the mine- workers. Curses and wild cries filled 
the air, and the darkness increased the horror 
of the situation. 

But the night had no terrors for Pieter. 
He hoped that there might be some chance for 
escape in the midst of the tumult, and he pro- 
posed to the Rainmaker that they again slide 
down the rope and return to the lower floor to 
wait for the opening of the door. On the way 
down the stairs they heard the crowd come 
nearer, and several shots were fired. Within 
the prison there was a great confusion. The 
prisoners awoke, called, and knocked on the 
doors. Pieter paused. “ We will release my 
countryman, 1 ” said he, and passing from door to 
door, knocked and called the Boer’s name. At 
last the reply came from within, and he slipped 
the iron in the lock and pushed with all his 
strength. But, although the Boer within laid his 
broad shoulder to the door, it refused to yield. 

All at once there sounded from without a ter- 
rible crash, which drowned all other noise, and 
for the instant silenced all within and without 
the prison. 

16 


CHAPTER XXIV 


DEMANDS OF THE TRANSVAAL GOVERNMENT 
IGNORED 

The solid house trembled and clattered and 
the anxious quiet was succeeded by wild cries and 
several shots, after which Pieter heard the 
people rush into the prison. In a few minutes 
the stairs were filled with the crowd of mine- 
workers, Kafirs and white men, armed with 
axes and hatchets, who broke open the doors 
and released the prisoners. Pieter seized his 
friend’s hand as he came from his cell, and they, 
together with the Rain maker, sought to escape 
from the crowd. 

It was with difficulty that they clambered 
over the ruins of the door shattered with dyna- 
mite and through the crowd, and when the 
Boers at last found themselves without, the 
Rainmaker had disappeared, not desiring com- 
pany in the rescue of his concealed diamonds. 
242 


DEMANDS OF THE TRANSVAAL IGNORED 243 

It was very fortunate now that the older Boer 
knew the country. He took Pieter to the farm 
of a friendly Boer not far from the city, who 
hired them a wagon in which to continue their 
journey to Bloemfontein, capital of the Orange 
Free State, where they hoped to be secure from 
English pursuit, and from which they could 
most easily return to the Transvaal. 

In two days they saw the flag of the Orange 
Free State, orange and white stripes, with the 
Dutch tri-color in the corner. The beautiful 
city well deserved its name, “ Flower Fountain,” 
with its many gardens and its tall eucalyptus 
and willow trees. The houses were tasteful, and 
many elegant equipages were on the streets. 
Men and women splendidly attired were taking 
their afternoon promenade. 

“ These people make an immense amount of 
money said Pieter’s companion. “ They sell 
meat and vegetables to the diamond fields, where 
they cost twice what they do elsewhere.” 

At the hotel they found great excitement over 
the Transvaal. Sir Hercules Robinson, who 
had succeeded Sir Bartle Frere as Governor- 
General of Cape Colony, had refused the de- 
mands of the Transvaal Government, and had 


244 


THE BOER BOY 


ordered Sir George Pomeroy Colley to strengthen 
his garrison in Transvaal. Thereupon the 
Boers had declared war, and a division of infan- 
try under First Lieutenant Anstruther had a 
battle with the Boers between Lydenburg and 
Pretoria, and had lost one hundred and twenty- 
three soldiers and all the officers, and the rest 
of the troops taken prisoners, This was the 
signal for a general uprising, and all the garri- 
sons in Pretoria and Potschefstrom were besieged 
in their forts. 

“ I am going to President Brand , 1 ” said Pieter 
to his companion, “ and ask him to give us 
horses and weapons that we may go home. ,, 

But, alas for his hopes ! Although President 
Brand received him kindly, he soon gave him 
to understand that he could not incur the enmity 
of England by furnishing a Transvaal Boer 
with arms. The disappointed boy, who had 
supposed all Boers were brothers, indignantly 
refused the offer of money and left the house to 
meet his old friend, Secretary of the Treasury 
Swart, who had come to try to induce President 
Brand at least to express sympathy with the 
Transvaal. Brand’s excessive caution and his 
English blood (his mother was English) would 


DEMANDS OF THE TRANSVAAL IGNORED 245 

not allow him to do this ; but the journey was 
fortunate in a way, for it provided Pieter and 
his friend a way to return home to Transvaal. 

When Pieter rode into Heidelberg, lie at once 
sought out Joubert’s house, over whose roof 
waved the Transvaal flag, the vier-klor — three 
horizontal stripes, red, white, and blue, and a 
green perpendicular stripe. Joyful at the sight 
of the sign of his fatherland’s independence, the 
boy swung his hat in the air and cried loudly : 
“ Hurrah for the Soutli African Republic !” 

From the circle of men before the door the 
General rose and shook the boy’s hand warmly. 
“ You came just in the nick of time,” said he. 
“ We have learned that General Colley is march- 
ing hither and is probably in or near Newcastle. 
He may come on the high road direct from 
Newcastle to Pretoria, but he must pass through 
one difficult piece of country — the Drakenberg 
— and there, with God’s help, we will stop him 
before he sets foot on Transvaal ground.” 

“ That we will !” echoed the Boers near by. 

“ There are several ways through the mount- 
ains from Newcastle,” continued Joubert. “The 
English can cross the Buffalo and go to Wak- 
kerstrom, or they can go up the river on the 


246 


THE BOER BOY 


right bank. We must learn what they are going 
to do, and you are the fellow to find out. To- 
morrow morning you and a dozen others must 
ride out to find the English.” 

As he walked through the camp that evening, 
Pieter was struck with the contrast between it 
and the English camps. Here was no gay sing- 
ing, no jesting speech, no gambling, no outbreak 
of military mirth or military roughness. The 
Boers were either silent, or talked together 
quietly. He paused at one place to listen to the 
evening service. “ God has given the Midian- 
ites into Gideon’s hands,” read the elder, for the 
Boers read always from the Old Testament, and 
they believe themselves to be the chosen people ; 
the English and the Kafirs are the Philistines, 
Amelekites, Midianites, and servants of Baal. 
The song that followed came harshly and un- 
musically from the rough throats, but it showed 
the fervor of their devotion. 

The next morning, with ten young Boers of 
about his own age, Pieter galloped off over the 
hilly land of Hooge Veldt to the Drakenberg, 
with which he was very familiar, the northern 
part through his journey to The Snake, the 
southern through his ride from Isandula. He 


DEMANDS OF THE TRANSVAAL IGNORED 247 

was now to go to a spot not far distant from 
Rorke’s Drift. 

On the second day they reached the foot of 
the mountain, near the border of Natal. Noth- 
ing was to be seen or heard of the English, and 
Pieter divided his force, sending five men across 
the Buffalo, on the left side, himself remaining 
with the five on the road leading to Newcastle. 
If nothing happened, they were to meet at the 
ford north of Newcastle, on the old post road 
between Newcastle and Wakkerstrom. 

As he was on hostile ground, Pieter advanced 
very cautiously, passing “ Coldstream Inn,” a 
farm called Laing’s Nek, Hatley’s Hotel, and, 
toward evening, the farm Schain’s Hoogte, with- 
out seeing or hearing anything of the English, 
and meeting at the ford his other companions, 
who had likewise seen or heard nothing of the 
enemy. 

Early next morning, protected by the fine 
mist that rose from the Buffalo, they rode into 
the mountains that tower immediately above 
Newcastle on the north, choosing a narrow, 
dangerously rough path, in order to avoid meet- 
ing a patrol. They went in the shadow of the 
trees, and none but the small, strong Boer horses 


248 


THE BOER BOY 


would have been able to make tlieir way over 
the almost impassable path. It gradually be- 
came lighter as they mounted higher ; the path 
ceased, and they rode up the steep slope among 
the trees and rocks that covered the mountain’s 
southern ridge. As they came out of the prickly 
mimosa thicket on to the mountain’s peak, they 
saw the morning sun shining through the woods 
on the hill east of them. 

All day they remained here, securely hid 
from observation, while watching Newcastle, 
which lay spread out at their feet. White tents 
filled the little green valley near the city, and 
there were single pickets — very few, however, 
and very near the city. How many troops 
there were, Pieter could not tell, but he hoped 
soon to learn. 

Evening came and the troops remained quiet. 
Evidently they did not yet intend to move. 
Pieter had thought out a way by which he could 
get to the city, and had noticed accurately how 
the pickets were placed at evening. 

“ Come,” said he, rising, “ we must do some- 
thing. Are you ready ? It would be fine if we 
young fellows could show our elders that we 
could be of use.” 


DEMANDS OF THE TRANSVAAL IGNORED 249 


“ Lead your horses and follow me,” he com- 
manded, when they assented, and together they 
picked their way through the dark down the 
mountain side. 

Pieter had observed from above that the 
soldiers were continually going and coming to 
and from a single house in the outskirts, near 
the country road, and concluded that an English 
picket was placed there to guard the road. He 
knew the careless English fashion of forepost 
service, and was satisfied that the soldiers re- 
mained comfortably in the house. He had seen 
that only a single infantry soldier stood outside, 
about two hundred steps from the house, on the 
country road. 

It was near midnight, and the city was per- 
fectly quiet, as Pieter led his little company near 
the house on the banks of the Incandu, a little 
stream north of Newcastle, emptying into the 
Buffalo, whose noisy current covered the sound 
of their voices. 

Taking but one of his companions, Pieter 
advanced on foot, trying to slip between the 
house and the picket. They had to clamber 
over a low wall, go through a garden, then a 
cornfield, and there at their left lay the lighted 


250 


THE BOER BOY 


house, from which they could hear the men’s 
voices. From the church tower came the mid- 
night stroke. As the two Boers crouched in the 
bushes the door opened and the relief appeared. 
The soldiers were too far away from them to 
hear the password. 

As Pieter and his companion now attempted 
to approach the house, the guard noticed them. 
“ Who goes there ?” he cried. 

“ Bound!” replied Pieter in a commanding 
tone. “ Are you watching carefully, guard ?” 

It was too dark for the man to see whether 
the man who approached him wore uniform. 
“ Give the password !” he said. 

“ Do you not know your own officer ?” asked 
Pieter, rebukingly. “Keep your eyes open, 
guard !” 

For a moment the man stood confused. Then 
he must have seen that the man who addressed 
him was no officer, for he called, “ Stop ! or I 
will shoot.” 

He had not reckoned on the Boer boy’s swift- 
ness. That instant Pieter’s hand was on his 
throat and he was disarmed and threatened with 
death if he spoke a word. Then Pieter sent 
him back to the Boers at the river, by his com- 


DEMANDS OF THE TRANSVAAL IGNORED 251 

panion, with orders for eight of them to join 
him immediately. 

Then lie slipped up to the house and peeped 
in at the window, which was a separate opening 
without glass, Boer-house fashion. In one room 
were eleven men and a subaltern asleep on 
benches and floor; in the other two officers, 
one presumably the commandant of the picket, 
both young men, second lieutenants. 

“ It is very tedious here,” said one. “ I wanted 
a furlough, but now this trouble with the Boers 
is on, it may be months before I get it.” 

“ Oh, no !” said the other. “ Once at Pretoria, 
we will soon settle them.” 

No laurels can be won in such a war,” said 
the other. “ It is only police service. These 
cattle drivers and peasants have neither cavalry 
nor artillery. They hide among the mountains 
and shoot at us as we pass.” 

“ Our Ninety-fourth suffered terribly,” replied 
his companion. “ They shoot remarkably well. 
But wait till they hear our cannon — that will 
frighten them. Our general thinks so, too, or 
he would not advance with only a thousand 
men.” 

Pieter smiled as he listened to this conversa- 


252 


THE BOER BOY 


tion. Concealed in the darkness, he heard dis- 
tinctly before his men arrived the strength of 
the English army, the time it would set out, and 
the direction of its march. 

“ Friends/’ said he to his men, as they came 
up, “ we must take the whole company prisoners, 
without allowing an alarm to be given. Stand 
at the windows with your guns to prevent 
escape.” 

Two men went before the house and two be- 
hind and guarded the windows. Followed by 
the others, Pieter entered the outer room. “ Sur- 
render !” he cried, threateningly, “ or we will 
shoot you down !” 

The half-aroused soldiers looked about in con- 
fusion and gave themselves up, when they found 
escape from the windows was impossible. Pieter 
left his companions there, and opening the door 
of the inner room, found the lieutenants in 
great confusion, one with his revolver in his 
hand, the other his sabre. A Boer stood before 
the window, his gun on the window-sill. The 
lieutenants had heard the noise in the other 
room, and supposed that they had been attacked 
by a greatly superior force, so that it was wiser 
not to use their weapons. 


DEMANDS OF THE TRANSVAAL IGNORED 253 

“ Gentlemen,” said Pieter, politely, and with 
a triumphant smile, “you are my prisoners. 
Offer no resistance. I should be sorry to have 
you shot. Will you give me your word of honor 
not to try to escape ?” 

“We do,” said both, after some consideration. 

In a short time all were disarmed, and the 
little company was on its way north along the 
high road back to the Boer army. 

The captured pickets raged inwardly when 
they saw by how small a force they had been 
taken, but General Joubert laughed when he 
saw them coming. He lay, with a thousand 
Boers, in the mountains north of Laing’s Nek. 


CHAPTER XXY 


THE BATTLE OF LAING’S NEK 

General Joubert had selected for his camp 
a little depression through which ran a brook, a 
tributary of the Buffalo. From this could be 
seen the road that ran from Newcastle through 
the mountain to Transvaal. On the other side 
of the road rose steep and rugged Majuba Mount- 
ain, the passing clouds draping its proud summit. 
To the south the heights bounded the horizon, 
through which ran the pass called Lange’s, or 
Laing’s Nek as the English call it, from Hans 
von Lange, who had been hanged there for the 
murder of an Englishman. 

General Smit, the commander-in-chief of the 
Boer troops, was in his headquarters at Pretoria. 
Slowly, from the distant north and west portions 
of Transvaal came the trains of Boers into the 
southeast part of the State, and only a part of 
254 


THE BATTLE OF LAING’s NEK 255 

the army was as yet in Natal under Joubert’s 
command. They came slowly, because they 
came in their ox wagons, but the army steadily 
increased, and Joubert thought that six thou- 
sand Boers in all would assemble. With such 
a force the commander hoped to cope with the 
great English army that was about to advance. 

The Boers had heard that General Roberts, 
who a short time before had made a bold and 
mucli-marveled-at march diagonally through all 
Afghanistan from Kabul to Kandahar, had been 
ordered to Africa, and they knew that many 
English regiments in Malta, London, and India 
had been ordered to prepare for the voyage to 
the Cape or Port Natal, for they had captured 
English papers in which they found this news. 

Now the scouts reported that General Colley 
had broken camp at Newcastle and marched 
north to Laing’s Nek. Pieter Maritz was among 
the men who, from the heights, watched the 
English force — first the dragoons, then the 
sharpshooters and mounted police officers of 
Natal, infantry and artillery, and General Colley 
among his officers. At Hatley’s Hotel they 
halted and made a camp, deeming the place 
suitable because of its elevated position. 


256 


THE BOEK BOY 


“He will not stay there/’ said Joubert, as he 
looked at the camp from the cliff of the Inkwel- 
oberg. “ He will come on if we keep still. If 
he comes down from his height and sticks in 
Laing’s Nek, we will fall on him from above.” 

The next morning, January 28th, 1881, the 
scouts announced that the English were striking 
their tents, and the Boers began to bestir them- 
selves. Those who were to remain behind saw 
to hitching the wagons, so that in case of defeat 
all would be ready for retreat. Those who were 
to go forward swung themselves into their 
saddles, surrounded their elders, and listened 
reverently to the morning devotional exercise. 

The sun was just rising over the heights along 
the Buffalo as they rode out under Joubert’s 
orders, one division turning to the right, another 
to the left, a third going straight ahead, and a 
fourth remaining behind near the camp as a 
reserve. Pieter Maritz was with the men of his 
community in the third group, two hundred 
strong. 

As they reached the pass, the Boer scouts rode 
hastily back to announce that the English were 
coming. The Boer groups divided, picked their 
way up the rocky mountain sides, and selected 


THE BATTLE OF LAING’s NEK 257 

good places from which their guns would com- 
mand the road. 

The road was very winding, as the nature of 
the hilly land demanded. In order to make the 
climbing of the heights and the descent into the 
valleys as easy as possible, the builders of the 
road had endeavored to follow the natural for- 
mation of the mountain. So it wound about the 
heights like a serpent, making it easy to attack 
a column passing along it both in front and rear. 
Baas van der Goot chose a natural terrace on a 
slope that commanded the pass, and, dismount- 
ing, crouched behind a stone, and looked with 
his right eye over the sight of his gun to the 
road. Pieter crouched beside him, greatly dis- 
turbed at the thought that to-day he must shoot 
at men with whom he had fought as a brother. 
Only the thought of the prison at Kimberley, of 
his dying father's words, and of the freedom 
denied his country nerved him to the conflict. 

Now the red coats of three dragoons appeared 
down the road. 

“ Pieter Maritz,” said Baas van der Goot, 
“ these men, I take it, are six hundred paces 
distant. You take the right, I will take the 
left one. But consider, boy, they are Christians. 


17 


258 


THE BOER BOY 


Shoot them in the head, that they may die 
quickly.” 

Fire flashed from the two guns and the dra- 
goons fell. As the third, terrified, turned to 
flee, a shot rang out from another place on the 
hillside and he, too, rolled on the dusty road. 
The shots echoed through the mountains and 
again all was still. 

Horns and trumpets were now heard, and soon 
the sharpshooters were seen, sent out in advance 
to drive away the enemy. They looked all 
about them, but could see no one. The Boers 
let them come close, so that they could get bet- 
ter aim. 

As the division of infantry followed, shots 
again resounded from the terrace. The officer 
who was in front fell forward on his face ; after 
him fell the subaltern and the soldiers. The 
troops stopped in confusion, fired wildly, and ran 
back ; the sharpshooters along the side of the 
road began to fire, answered by shots from the 
Boers. 

For a quarter of an hour the fight lasted, 
nothing being seen of the English save the sharp- 
shooters. Then a hundred foot soldiers came 
running along the pass, scattering themselves 


THE BATTLE OF LAING’s NEK 259 

along the road, trying to find protection in the 
grass, between trees, bushes, and stones. A 
higher officer, on horseback, followed — Pifter 
recognized him as Colonel Deane — accompanied 
by others, and behind them came the mountain 
guns, each drawn by six mules. The guns were 
lifted from the carriages and pointed at the 
mountain side, the infantry meantime keeping 
up a steady, protecting fire about the artillerists. 

For a moment the Boers looked curiously at 
the guns ; then they began again their steady, 
careful fire. Old Baas van der Goot pulled his 
hat over his left ear, that the mounting sun 
might not shine on his sight, and aimed care- 
fully at the commanding officer. When he 
fired, the reins fell from Colonel Deane’s hands, 
and he fell backward on his horse’s croup. Two 
officers hastened up to support him, but while 
they were in the act of dismounting they fell, 
and the Colonel himself slipped heavily from 
his horse. Shot upon shot came from the 
mountain side, and confusion seized the English, 
for after a few minutes not an officer among 
them stood on his feet or sat in his saddle. 

But the artillerists did their work bravely 
without commanders and they aimed well, for 


260 


THE BOER BOY 


the first cannon-shot fell near Pieter's head. 
One after another the cannon boomed, and then 
the artillerists began to fall, one by one, as they 
attempted to approach the guns. Soon the sur- 
viving artillerists fastened the guns on the car- 
riages, lashed the mules, and fled wildly around 
the curve of the road. The confused mass of 
infantry followed them. Brave as they were, 
this slow, sure fire from an unseen enemy filled 
them with terror. 

Nothing now was to be seen in the j^ass save 
the heaps of dead bodies, but in the distance, 
where the principal part of the English force 
stood, sounds arose that indicated an attack on 
the flank. Shots could be heard, and from the 
heights rose many clouds of smoke. Pieter 
could not see the course of the battle distinctly 
from the terrace, but it was evident that the 
English were not able to gain a footing on the 
mountain. 

The shooting now ceased entirely, and the 
Boers swung themselves again on their horses 
and rode down the mountain to the place of 
battle. Most of the men were dead, but among the 
living the Boers passed, offering them their can- 
teens and caring for their wounds. Used as 


THE BATTLE OF LAING’s NEK 261 

they were to living in remote communities, 
where doctors were few, they had learned to 
help themselves in times of necessity, and they 
bound up the wounds skillfully. 

“ What is that, my boy ?” asked Baas van 
der Goot. “Do you see the white flag there ?” 

Down the road came an officer of the dra- 
goons, swinging a white cloth on his sword. 
Pieter recognized him as Lord Fitzherbert, but 
when he approached his angry eyes expressed 
no recognition of his former friend. 

“ General Colley wishes to arrange with you 
for a brief truce,” said lie, when General Jou- 
bert had been pointed out to him, “ in order to 
bury the dead and care for the wounded.” 

“ I am ready to make such arrangements. 
General Colley may come to speak with me.” 

Lord Fitzherbert bit his lips. “ The General 
asks that you will come to him.” 

“ I should think,” said Joubert, pleasantly, 
“ that if General Colley wanted anything of me, 
he could come to me. However, tell him I will 
meet him half way down the road.” 

The conference arranged, General Colley took 
the opportunity to entreat the Boers to give up 
their opposition to the English, which he assured 


262 


THE BOER BOY 


them was useless, ending by a threat that they 
would finally be crushed by the superior force 
of England. 

“Let the army come,” said Joubert. “We 
submit ourselves to fate and to the almighty 
hand of the just God who directs the lot of 
nations/* 

“Amen !” cried the Boers about him. 

At this moment a strange sight attracted the 
attention of the English General. A train of 
Boers came down from the heights bearing the 
wounded English soldiers ; sometimes two, one 
holding the head and shoulders, one the legs; 
again others of the tall, strong men carrying a 
soldier in their arms like a child. Down from 
the hills they continued to come, and went over 
the battlefield seeking the living, refreshing 
them with water and bearing them to the ambu- 
lances. Pieter noticed that General Colley looked 
with astonishment at the Boers, and that he was 
not only touched by this proof of the pious 
Christian disposition of these people, but that 
the contrast between them and his own soldiers 
was remarkable to him. When he learned that 
the Boers had lost twelve dead and twenty 
wounded, while his own loss was one hundred 


THE BATTLE OF LAING’s NEK 


263 


and sixty-nine dead and wounded, besides many 
officers, his face became gloomy and he soon 
withdrew to his former position at Hatley’s 
Hotel, where that night the Boer patrol reported 
that the soldiers were engaged fortifying the 
walls. 


CHAPTER XXVI 


REPUBLIC AGAINST MONARCHY 

An English messenger to General Colley, 
captured by the Boers a few days after the dis- 
astrous battle of Laing’s Nek, carried a letter 
from Sir Evelyn Wood in Natal, saying that he 
hoped to reach him with a large reinforcement 
on the twentieth of February. 

“ My friends,” said General Joubert to his 
leaders, in council, “ we must not allow General 
Wood to march here. We will send out a 
strong division south, past Newcastle, to stop 
the English when they come up from Lady- 
smith. At Biggarberg is just such a position as 
we had at Laing’s Nek. Besides this, we will 
set a strong force on the way between Newcastle 
and Hatley’s Hotel, so that General Colley can 
neither go forward nor backward.” 

The next day it rained, and the hills and val- 

264 


REPUBLIC AGAINST MONARCHY 


265 


leys of the Drakenberg were veiled in mist, as 
the force of three hundred mounted Boers rode 
slowly up the heights. “ See,” said Baas van 
der Goot, who led them, as they halted for 
breakfast on the edge of a wood of umbrella- 
shaped mimosas. “ Joubert himself could find 
no better position than this. We are midway 
between Newcastle and Hatley’s Hotel ; down 
there is Schain’s Hoogte, and, without our per- 
mission, no one, unless he had wings, could get 
from one place to the other.” 

As he spoke, a Boer rode hurriedly past to 
the north without spying the group. He was 
recalled by a shrill whistle, and announced that 
he was seeking them to inform them that the 
English camp was breaking up, probably to 
return to Newcastle. 

Baas van der Goot turned to his companions. 
“ I will ride out with twenty men ; the rest of 
you remain here.” 

The little troop rode down the road by which 
the English must return to Newcastle and soon 
reached the Biver Ingogo. Pieter Maritz, who 
rode at the end of the right wing, thought, just 
as he crossed the river, that he heard the sound 
of weapons down the road. Just before him 


266 


THE BOER BOY 


was the gleam of red coats, and at that moment 
a gust of wind lifted the mist and he found 
himself face to face with a troop of dragoons. 
His warning whistle to his companions was 
simultaneous with a shout in the well-known 
voice of Lord Fitzlierbert. 

“ Forward on them! Attack !” cried lie, 
rushing forward with high-swung sword. 

A scene of wildest confusion followed this 
sudden and unexpected meeting. The Boers 
were too close to the enemy to follow their 
usual custom of shooting from concealment. 
Several of them shot from their horses, then 
turned and fled, and in the flight down the 
ravine and across the river their small, strong 
horses were of great advantage to them. 

On the other bank Peter paused to observe a 
conflict that was taking place in the middle of 
the stream between Baas van der Goot and an 
English officer whom he had long known. The 
old Boer parried the thrusts of his enemy’s 
sword with his gun for a time, and then, throw- 
ing his weapon into the stream, grappled with 
his enemy and leaped with him from his horse 
into the water. There they wrestled, breast to 
breast, as if rooted on the bed of the stream, 


REPUBLIC AGAINST MONARCHY 267 

lips tight shut, old Baas’ hat fallen from his 
head, and his white hair shining in the sunlight. 
The horses of the two soldiers remained stand- 
ing at their sides, and for the moment both 
Boer and English paused to watch the con- 
flict. But the stronger muscles of the Boer 
won the victory. With a powerful jerk old 
Baas wrenched his left hand free, and still hold- 
ing his opponent with his right hand, drew his 
hanger from its sheath and plunged it into the 
Englishman’s body. With a wild cry, the man 
spread out his arms and fell forward in the water. 

But vengeance was near. As Baas van der 
Goot set his foot in the stirrup, Lord Fitzher- 
bert rushed forward, swung his sword high in 
the air, and brought it down on the bare head. 
The swift-gushing blood dyed the white hair, 
the old man’s foot slipped from the stirrup and 
he fell backward into the stream, whose waves 
covered him as they had his opponent. 

Pieter dashed up to the English officer. 
“ Here, Adolphus !” he cried, “ I will test the 
sword you once gave me on yourself.” 

Lord Fitzherbert prepared himself for the 
fight. “ So be it, Pieter,” said he. 

“ But first my thanks, Adolphus,” said the 


2G8 


THE BOER BOY 


Boer boy, “ for taking care of my horse and 
arms while I was a prisoner.” 

“ It was a friend’s duty,” replied the English- 
man, “ and I regret that the time has come when 
you defiant Boers measure your strength with 
ours, hut we will both do our duty.” 

Tears sprang to Pieter’s eyes, hut he rode 
forward. It was not the first time they had 
fought together, for from the Englishman Pieter 
had learned, while in captivity, the art of fencing. 

“ For Her Majesty the Queen !” cried Lord 
Fitzherbert, as the swords crossed. 

“ For the South African Republic !” cried 
Pieter. 

Lord Fitzherbert sent hack the dragoons who 
rode up to his assistance. His pride was aroused, 
for he knew how difficult a task he had before 
him. His temper rose, too, as he fancied that 
his opponent parried his thrusts skillfully, with- 
out attacking him, and he recalled the fluttering 
blonde hair he had once pursued in vain. He 
pushed his horse close to Pieter, and made a 
heavy stroke at the boy’s head. Pieter partly 
warded off the blow with his blade, and his own 
blood began to rise, but the remembrance of the 
old friendship held him back. Suddenly re- 


REPUBLIC AGAINST MONARCHY 


269 


calling how Lord William Beresford had carried 
a wounded sergeant through the river at Ulundi, 
he pressed Jager against the black horse, took 
his sword in his teeth, and with a sudden, power- 
ful movement flung his arms about his friend 
and lifted him into his saddle. 

“ Your pardon, Adolphus !” he cried. “It 
couldn’t be helped. You took me prisoner once ; 
now you are my prisoner.” 

The two dragoons who pursued him across 
the river both fell by the sword which he swung 
with his free arm, and he galloped off to his 
people with his prisoner, followed by the faith- 
ful black horse, comforting his shamed and 
angry friend as best he might. 

In the barren hills north of Schain’s Hoogte, 
along the road which the enemy must come, the 
Boers ensconced themselves, and soon the 
sparkle of weapons near the Ingogo and the 
wheels of wagons and guns announced the ap- 
proach of the English. Since his defeat at 
Laing’s Nek, Colley had grown cautious, and 
now he had sent foot soldiers in advance care- 
fully to spy out the way. Two guns and a little 
company of men remained at the bridge to 
secure a retreat, if necessary. 


270 


THE BOER BOY 


The Boers liad secured excellent hiding places 
behind stones and bushes. Pieter chose a little 
embankment high enough to protect Jager as 
well as himself, and lay flat, gun over the edge 
of bank, Jager’s rein over his right arm. 

The English soldiers liad caught sight of the 
enemy, and opened the fire, concealing them- 
selves as much as possible, Boer fashion. 

The English artillery had an excellent place 
and the shrapnel flew with such precision that, 
at a whistle from Klaas Buurman, the Boers re- 
treated, but when pursued by the redcoats were 
already under cover and able to drive back the 
pursuing enemy with a heavy fire. 

The battle was long and severe, for the Eng- 
lish had learned a lesson at Laing’s Nek, fought 
better and protected themselves better ; but the 
Boers’ position was so well taken, their aim so 
correct, that they were not able to dislodge them 
from their hills. When the artillerists were shot 
down and the mules killed, and when many of 
the officers had fallen, confusion reigned among 
the English troops. 

But again they rallied, and the fight raged 
three hours longer, Colley still hoping, because 
of his superior force, to be able to continue his 


REPUBLIC AGAINST MONARCHY 271 


march. At the end of that time firing began 
on both right and left flanks of his army, and 
the Boers knew that Joubert’s reinforcements 
had arrived. 

Still the English fought desperately, deter- 
mined to win their way through the jDass, when 
suddenly aid came from heaven. The darkened 
sky and pealing thunder announced the terrible 
African thunderstorm. The rain fell in tor- 
rents, the frightened soldiers became uncontrol- 
lable, and English and Boer no longer made any 
effort to continue the fight. One officer with a 
flag of truce led those who sought the wounded, 
and several Boers appeared to assist them.' At 
the river the confusion was even greater, and 
many were swept away in the swollen stream. 

Pieter remained in the saddle all night, and 
early next morning, when he had seen the last 
redcoat disappear toward the camp, he turned 
Jager’s head toward the Boer host at Laing\s 
Nek. 


CHAPTER XXVII 


PIETER IN THE ENEMY’S CAMP 

Pieter Maritz, on picket duty before the 
Boer camp, chafed at the inactivity of the 
army. 

Eighteen days had elapsed since the battle of 
Schain's Hoogte. Had the Boers fallen on the 
disheartened soldiers at Hatley’s Hotel they 
could have won an easy victory. But he knew 
his countrymen. These strong men were as 
quiet as they were brave ; they waited for what 
would happen, let things come to them — had no 
mind for warlike undertakings. Joubert knew 
that it would have been shrewder to attack the 
English camp, but he had to do what would 
please his countrymen. 

As Pieter thought thus and recalled General 
Wood’s letter, he fancied he heard in the dis- 
tance the sound of horses’ hoofs and the clatter 
272 


PIETER IN THE ENEMY’S CAMP 273 

of sabres. It was very faint and only percep- 
tible occasionally, but his sharp ear was able to 
distinguish it from the sounds of nature. 

Riding forward some distance and carefully 
concealing himself behind a thicket, he saw dis- 
tinctly the gay uniform of the Fifteenth Regi- 
ment Hussars and the Gordon Highlanders. 
He hastened back to Joubert with the news. 

“ I read in your face,” said the General, “ that 
you wished to attack General Colley.” 

“ Yes,” replied Pieter. “ I think six hundred 
determined men could have taken them all 
prisoners.” 

“ Certainly,” replied the commander, “ and I 
should have been delighted to do it. But our 
people have no taste for such things, and also 
the Government at Pretoria does not wish us to 
attack — they wish to show the English that we 
are only on the defensive in case of j^eril. They 
are hoping every day that England will offer 
peace.” 

That night, after supper, Pieter rode out into 
the mountains to the farthest Boer picket. His 
heart misgave him. The English, he knew, 
must be planning something. Colley was an 
active, madly daring man. Now that reinforce- 
18 


274 


THE BOER BOY 


rnents had come, lie would be preparing to strike 
a new blow, the more so that his opinion of the 
Boers must have lessened because of their in- 
activity. 

It was a beautiful starlight night, the faint 
sickle of the new moon hanging over the great 
black peak of Majuba. The Boer pickets sur- 
rounded the enemy’s camp in a semicircle ; the 
English pickets were distinctly visible, far apart 
and single, for Colley was short of men and 
had to spare both men and beasts. 

Pieter had often watched the camp at night 
and knew the customs as well as they could be 
known from a distance. As he watched to-night 
it seemed to him that there was an unusual stir 
about the camp, the clatter of weapons and an 
occasional call of command. He strained eye 
and ear and leaned far over, with wrinkled brow, 
to catch every sound. A thought occurred to 
him, was banished, but came again and again. 
He would try to get into the enemy’s camp, to 
learn what was going on. Daring courage and 
confidence in his luck inspired him. 

He rode back and called to the nearest picket, 
an old friend. 

“ Listen, Jacob,” said he ; “ I am going to find 


PIETER IN THE ENEMY’S CAMP 275 

out what they are doing over there. Keep my 
horse and weapons for 1116.” 

While he talked he cut off with his sword a 
stout staff from the acacia bush. 

“ Do you see that dragoon over there ? I am 
going to him. When you hear me whistle, 
come and help me.” 

Pieter took his long staff and went along the 
country road toward the dragoon, whose helmet 
was visible through the darkness. When he 
was within a few hundred paces of the picket, 
he bowed his slender, active form, leaned on his 
staff and went along with a slow, shuffling step, 
coughing pitifully, like a broken old man. The 
dragoon, whose next picket stood at a long 
distance, nearer to the mountain, was evidently 
deceived, for he allowed the man to come close 
to him. 

“ Who , s there ?” he cried then. “ Stand still, 
old friend. Whence come you, and whither go 
you ? No stranger can pass here.” 

“ Ah, dear sir,” said Pieter in Dutch, in a 
trembling voice, “ I want to go over to Schain’s 
Hoogte. Let me pass.” 

“ No, indeed,” replied the dragoon. “ If you 
want to get to Schain’s Hoogte, old friend, you 


276 


THE BOER BOY 


must climb over tlie mountain. No one goes 
by the road.” 

“Cannot understand, cannot understand,” re- 
plied Pieter, coming nearer. 

While lie spoke tlie dragoon suddenly saw 
to his terror the bent form straighten, felt his 
throat clutched by an iron hand, and heard a 
threat in good English that he would lose his 
life if he did not keep still. 

At the sound of Pieter’s whistle Jacob gal- 
loped up, delighted at the sight of the captured 
dragoon, and still more astonished at Pieter’s 
next act. For he laid aside his blouse and hat 
and commanded the dragoon, whom he had 
gagged, to exchange garments with him. The 
coat cracked in the seams, but the fit was not 
bad, and Pieter armed himself, mounted the 
horse, and ordered Jacob to take the English- 
man back with him. 

As Pieter sat in the dragoon’s place awaiting 
the hour of relief, at which he could go to the 
English camp, he thought little of the peril of 
his situation, although he did not underestimate 
it. He knew that if he was discovered the 
English would show him no mercy, but the 
weapons gave him courage, and he was deter- 


PIETER IN THE ENEMY’S CAMP 277 

mined not to be taken alive. There might still 
be among the dragoons some of the men he had 
known in the Zulu war, and others who had 
been at Heidelberg when Lord Fitzherbert had 
arrested him, but he trusted that the night was 
dark enough to prevent his being rocognized. 

In half an hour a subaltern appeared with 
six men. 

“ Who goes there ?” cried Pieter. 

“ Relief,” they replied. 

“ Password?” asked Pieter, who was familiar 
with English picket duty. 

“Majuba,” said the sergeant. 

“ Password correct. Relief approach,” said 
Pieter. 

A dragoon rode up and took the place, and 
Pieter rode on with the soldiers, who did not 
notice him, going about their duty wearily and 
indifferently. Pieter thought about the pass- 
word. What could Majuba signify ? Had it 
been chosen accidentally by General Colley, or 
had it some special meaning ? 

The men in the camp were drowsy and dull, 
and Pieter found it easy to avoid their notice. 
He tied his horse witli the others, taking care 
to keep his face in shadow, wrapped himself in 
the dragoon’s mantle with the collar turned up, 


278 


THE BOER BOY 


and strolled about the camp, aided by the con- 
fusion caused by the arrival of the new troops. 
The hussars and highlanders were still busy 
with the erection of their tents, and sat and lay 
around the fires, talking, drinking, and smok- 
ing. The old troops, four weeks in camp, 
seemed depressed and weary, and were for the 
most part asleep. Yet it seemed to Pieter that 
a certain suspense and expectation were to be felt 
in the camp, unnoticeable to any save one very 
familiar with military affairs. The pickets at 
the walls were continually looking toward the 
tents, as if expecting something to happen 
there ; none of the officers had retired, the win- 
dows in Hatley’s Hotel were still brightly 
lighted, and from time to time an adjutant 
passed through the camp and talked with officers 
who sat about the fires. 

Pieter approached a fire about which sat a 
group of hussars, none of whom could possibly 
recognize him, since they came from another 
part of the earth. He sat down on a bundle 
and waited for some one to address him. 

“ Well, comrade,” finally said a handsome 
young fellow, who wore his cap over his right 
ear, “ have you been in Africa long?” 

“ For some time,” replied Pieter. 


PIETER IN' THE ENEMY’S CAMP 279 


“ Were you in the Zulu war?” 

“ Yes, I took part in it.” 

“ Did you get through all right ?” 

“ With an assagai thrust in my arm.” 

“ Assagai !” said tlie hussar. “ That’s a great 
word. I suppose it’s a kind of spear. It’s a 
pity we had not been there. We would have 
hacked the niggers to a fricassee.” 

“ Well, now you have a chance to hack the 
Boers to a fricassee,” said the supposed dragoon. 

“ Yes, the Boers,” said the hussar, thought- 
fully. “ I have heard on the way that they are 
mighty fine shots. Is it true?” 

“ Well, they shoot passably,” replied Pieter. 
“ But now that we have received reinforcements 
we shall soon defeat them. Where is General 
Wood now ?” 

“ General Wood was in Port Natal when we 
arrived, but they said lie would leave there soon. 
I think he can be here with a thousand men in 
eight days.” 

“ It would be well if he came soon,” said 
Pieter, “ for we can’t begin alone. We have 
lost many men.” 

“ You seem to lack courage, comrade,” said 
the hussar. “Are not we here? Where we 


280 


THE BOER BOY 


hussars are, all goes well. If we could only 
attack the Boers on the open field, you would 
see how we manage things. You should have 
seen how we chased the yellow rascals in 
Afghanistan ; you should have seen General 
Roberts ! He’s the fellow for you !” 

Some officers and a man in Boer dress came 
out of the house door, talking earnestly, and 
walked through the east side of the camp. As 
they passed a fire Pieter recognized the man 
next to the Boer as General Colley. Arising, 
he sauntered carelessly near the place where they 
stood. The Scots camped there, and he joined in 
a group of them near a fire, close to the officers. 

“ It is cool to-night,” said Pieter to one of the 
men, who was smoking a short pipe. 

The men crowded closer to make room for 
him, but he scarcely heard what they said, so 
intent was lie on listening the conversation of 
the General and the Boer, who stood not more 
than ten steps away from him. 

“ It is dark enough not to be seen and light 
enough to find the way,” said the General. 
“ Are you sure you could lead us there in two 
hours without the Boers smelling a mouse ?” 

“ Yes,” answered the Boer in English. “ The 


PIETER IN THE ENEMY’S CAMP 281 


Boer pickets stand in a semicircle out there, but 
on the south the land is free, and if we make a 
circuit over the mountains, we can get there 
without being seen. ,, 

“ He is a wretched man who would betray his 
countrymen,” said Pieter to himself, “ but after 
all he is a Natal Boer of English blood.” As 
he thought thus he was interrupted by one of 
the highlanders. “ Is that according to regu- 
lation with the dragoon guards ?” he asked, 
pointing to the leather trousers and high, soft 
riding boots which the Boer boy wore, and 
which were now visible because his mantle had 
fallen aside. 

For a second Pieter was disconcerted. His 
breath stopped, he realized the terrible conse- 
quences, should he be discovered. But he col- 
lected himself quickly. 

“Ah, according to regulation ! ” he said, laugh- 
ing. “When one has been as long in the field 
as we have, he is glad if he can get a whole 
piece of anything to cover his legs.” 

The sergeant was satisfied, and Pieter again 
turned his attention to General Colley. 

“ The ascent will be very tiresome,” said he. 

“ Yes,” returned the Boer. “ The mountain 


282 


THE BOER BOY 


is very steep, but once you are up, you find a 
beautiful position. It is level up there, and 
great stones lie around the edge that form a 
good shelter for the soldiers.” 

“ Will it be possible to take up the cannon ?” 
“ No.” 

“ It would be well,” said the General to the 
two officers, “ if we could at least take up one of 
the Gatling guns. Do you think, Bomilly, that 
your men could drag up one of them without 
horses ?” 

“ If it is possible to human strength,” replied 
the officer, “ it shall be done.” 

“ We must have them, if it is possible,” said 
Colley. “ They shoot down ten men for every 
one of ours that is shot down. I consider this 
investment of Majuba a capital idea. Up there 
we will have just such an advantage over the 
Boers as they have hitherto had over us.” 

Major Hay, of the highlanders, endeavored to 
dissuade the General from his purpose, because 
of the difficulty of defending so steep and high 
a mountain. But the General persisted, declar- 
ing that it was an excellent position, because no 
Boer could approach them under cover, and 
therefore would not undertake to approach them 


PIETER m THE ENEMY’S CAMP 283 

at all. “The occupation of Majuba,” said he, 
“ will decide the war. General Wood will be 
here in a few days, and from the mountain we 
can communicate with him by heliograph. If 
we keep this commanding position on Majuba 
until then, the war is over. Threatened from 
Majuba as from an invincible fastness, and then 
attacked by General Wood, the Boers will sue 
for peace. The thought that we can burn their 
villages and drive away their cattle will soon 
bring them to their senses. I have made every 
imaginable effort for peace, and in my dispatches 
to the Minister of War I have mentioned with 
praise the conduct of the Boers toward our 
wounded. But I find they make the rebels no 
conditions, so long as they have weapons in 
their hands. We must punish them before we 
offer them peace. Who will not hear, must 
feel.” 

General Colley stepped nearer the fire and 
looked at his watch. 

“ Half an hour until midnight,” said he. 
“ By three o’clock we must be at the foot of the 
mountain, and when the sun rises the Boers 
must be waked by the balls of our Gatling 
guns.” 


284 


THE BOER BOY 


With these words he turned and went toward 
the buildings. As Pieter looked after him he 
caught the voice of the sergeant, who said, 
scornfully, “ Well, old prophet, what now ?” 

Looking around, he noticed an old man with 
gray beard, who looked after the General with 
a strange expression in his eyes. 

“ What do you see, McGregor ?” repeated the 
sergeant. “ Ghosts again ?” 

The old Scot shook his head. His gray eyes 
shone with a strange light. 

“ Sunday has begun,” said he. “ I have ob- 
served our General when the firelight fell on 
his face.” 

“Well?” asked the sergeant, while the rest 
of the soldiers looked with startled eyes at the 
graybeard. 

“ He is marked,” said the old Scotchman. 
“ To-morrow evening our General will no longer 
be alive.” 

Pieter shuddered and thought of his own 
fate. How was he to escape unperceived from 
the enemy’s camp ? 


CHAPTER XXVIII 


THE STORMING OF MAJUBA 

If Joubert could only be informed at once, 
lie could fall on the English on the march. But 
how to escape from the camp? It was impos- 
sible for Pieter to escape on horseback, because 
of the guard. He thought of clambering over 
the wall and running away on foot — this was 
desperate; but just as he was preparing to at- 
tempt it he was called by a subaltern of the 
dragoons, who ordered him to saddle his horse at 
once. There was nothing to do but to obey and 
begin the march, trusting to luck to escape be- 
fore daylight would bring recognition and death. 

Five hundred and forty-eight men from the 
highlanders, sharpshooters, and marines, besides 
the hussars and a troop of dragoons, were 
chosen to make the ascent ; the others remained 
behind to defend the camp until the arrival of 
General Wood. 


285 


286 


THE BOER BOY 


They marched silently over hill and valley 
until the giant form of the mountain was seen 
distinctly against the clear sky. Its peak was 
flat, like that of all South African mountains ; 
on every side the slopes fell off steeply, though 
they were less rugged on the side of the Boer 
camp than on that by which the English as- 
cended. 

General Colley marched all the troops up 
to the place where the cone of the mountain 
began. The ascent was too steep for cavalry 
so he ordered the hussars and dragoons and 
two companies of infantry to remain as a reserve 
to keep connection with the camp, while a di- 
vision of about four hundred men and twenty 
officers were chosen to make the ascent. General 
Colley himself threw aside his staff, that he 
might have both hands free for climbing, and 
led the way with encouraging shouts. 

The ascent there was very difficult, with many 
clefts and huge loose stones. The soldiers scat- 
tered over the mountain without an}" order, and 
even the highlanders, who were skilled climbers, 
discovered it to be a task that demanded all their 
strength and skill. The sailors found it impos- 
sible to drag their gun any farther, and General 


THE STOIIMING OF MAJUBA 287 

Colley, furious at the failure, at last commanded 
it to be left behind. 

Pieter saw that day would soon dawn, and 
also observed that the attention of the soldiers 
at the foot of the cone was fixed on the men 
struggling up the steep ascent, or that they were 
busied with their horses, or at rest. The moment 
seemed propitious for flight, as no pickets had 
yet been stationed. He rode away slowly to the 
right, as though unintentionally, stopping fre- 
quently to look up at the mountain, until he was 
past the last redcoat. Some dragoons looked 
after him, and he heard one ask another what 
the comrade was going to do, but they did not 
call or pursue him. As soon as he was out of 
sight, he galloped toward the Boer camp, nar- 
rowly escaping death at the hands of his own 
pickets, surprised at the sight of a man in 
dragoon’s uniform hastening toward them. 

General Joubert laughed at the figure he cut 
in his red coat and white helmet, but his face 
grew grave when he heard of the reason for it, 
and of the investment of Majuba. 

“ My young friend,” said he, “ you have 
earned the thanks of the republic.” 

Carefully General Joubert observed the form 


288 


THE BOER BOY 


of the mountain whose outline showed distinctly 
against the blue sky. Gray-blue lay the barren 
peak, dark furrows indicated depressions, and 
very dark places showed ravines and holes in 
the steep cone. 

“ Now I see the English,” said Joubert, sud- 
denly, after he had looked a long time through 
his glass. “ They have reached the summit.” 

“ General Colley has thought that out very 
finely,” he added, “ but I think we will catch 
him so up there that he will come down faster 
than he went up. I will call a council of war 
and decide what to do. There is plenty of time. 
Our people shall breakfast in peace.” 

Lord Fitzherbert, who, since his captivity, 
slept in Klaas Buurman’s wagon, sat up and 
rubbed his eyes sleepily when he saw Pieter. 
“What in the world are you doing in that 
masquerade ?” he cried. 

“To-day you shall see that we Boers can also 
make an attack,” replied Pieter, proudly. “ Gen- 
eral Colley, with more than four hundred men, 
is up there on the peak of Majuba.” 

Lord Fitzherbert looked toward the moun- 
tain, and when Pieter told his story, stared at 
him in astonishment. 


THE STORMING OF MAJUBA 


289 


“ Oil, Pieter,” said lie, “ you Boers are a ter- 
rible people, and I see that your star is now in 
the ascendant.” 

Sadly he sat, watching the Boer boy preparing 
breakfast. 

“ What a soldier you have become, Pieter !” 
he exclaimed at last. “ What a cavalry officer 
you would make ! Oh, if you were only with us 
in the service of the Queen ! You would surely 
become famous ; you would become a great gen- 
eral !” 

Pieter laughed and shook his head, and the 
two, the Englishman in a Boer coat, and the 
Boer boy in English uniform, sat like brothers 
at their breakfast of coffee and maize mush. At 
nine o’clock the active company of mounted 
Boers assembled at the edge of the camp, and 
Pieter hastened to join the men of his commu- 
nity. A company of two hundred men went 
toward the northern slope of Majuba to under- 
take the storming of it, while other divisions 
stood ready to meet any chance attacks from 
the English troops remaining below. 

Majuba was silent; no sound came from the 
enemy, no weapon had been fired since the three 
shots that were the signal to the forces below 


19 


290 


THE BOER BOY 


of the complete investment of the mountain. 
As he approached, Pieter could see the form and 
nature of the mountain very clearly in the 
bright sunlight, and could distinguish the rocks, 
ravines, and bushes on the slopes. General 
Joubert had chosen the best place for the storm- 
ing, and Pieter could but. think of the old 
Scotchman’s prophecy, for the mountain offered 
the Boers many favorable opportunities to fight 
their way up, step by step, under cover. 

At the foot of the mountain the Boers dis- 
mounted and left their horses. Two thousand 
feet above them rose the peak of the mountain, 
steep and threatening. But the English had 
seen them, and several shots resounded, and 
bullets whistled round their heads. Like hunt- 
ers who would slip up on the wary prey, the 
Boers went forward, a dangerous company. 

Pieter and several companions found a ravine, 
which ran up the mountain, and in which they 
would be entirely protected from shots from 
above. The mountain was much easier of 
ascent on this side than on that by which the 
English had ascended, but nevertheless it was 
very steep and required much strength and 
skill in mounting. 


FT”' 



THE STORMING OF MAJUBA HILL 










* 























' 























































































































































. • 














































































































THE STORMING OF MA JUBA 


291 


When Pieter reached the end of the ravine, 
he peeped forth cautiously and saw the enemy. 
A thousand feet above him, above the stones 
that formed a breastwork about the flat top, his 
sharp eye distinguished the uniform of an officer 
of the highlanders. He lifted his gun, the shot 
echoed through the mountain, the Boers’ first 
shot of the day, and the officer fell. For a 
moment confusion reigned among the high- 
landers. Then shots whistled down on the 
invisible enemy. But while they shot, their 
helmets and faces showed above the breastwork, 
and the balls from the ravine flew with deadly 
accuracy. One by one the Scots fell, and soon 
their fire ceased altogether. 

The broad hats now appeared to the right 
and left of Pieter, and soon a long chain of 
sharpshooters surrounded the high peak on the 
north and east, behind huge stones and prickly 
bushes. Clambering up like chamois, they 
sprang from stone to stone, rising quickly, run- 
ning stooped over, and quickly crouching behind 
a new cover. These strong men set their whole 
strength and skill to the task of coming nearer 
to the hated enemy, their sober, slow natures 
roused by the ardor of climbing and of battle. 


292 


THE BOER BOY 


In the powder smoke of Majuba they showed 
for the first time their complete fitness for battle. 
Under a rain of bullets, against a far superior 
force, up an almost perpendicular mountain, they 
]3assed to victory. Their attack was ceaseless. 
They hung to the mountain, they lay behind 
rocks as if they were part of its rocky cover- 
ing, and they sprang forward if they wished to 
reach a new place of protection as if they had 
wings. The fight had already lasted an hour, 
ten thousand bullets had rained down upon 
them, and they had not lost a single man. 

Pieter was with a group of a dozen Boers 
in the foremost line. They had found a new 
ravine, only five hundred paces from the sum- 
mit, and fired upon the enemy from there in 
perfect concealment. The position of the Eng- 
lish was well taken, but they scarcely dared to 
show their heads, for the sight of a helmet or a 
bit of red cloth brought the whistle of a Boer’s 
bullet. It could easily be seen that the English 
soldiers were terrified and aimed their guns 
very guardedly. 

“ If only we could reach the edge,” said 
Pieter to his companions, “ we would have the 
victory. From there we could command the 


THE STORMING OF MAJUBA 


293 


whole level field of the summit, and few could 
escape.” 

While he spoke he noticed a movement among 
the enemy. The English had determined to 
make an attempt to change their position. In a 
division that moved to one side lie recognized 
the blue jackets of the sailors among the red 
coats. This division ran to a rock cone, which 
lay a little below the true peak of the mountain, 
and from which the attacking enemy could per- 
haps be caught on the flank. Several of the 
English fell before the cone was reached, but 
they soon disappeared behind it and opened a 
sharp fire on the Boers. A man near Pieter 
received a shot in his arm, and another’s hat 
was torn from his head. 

“ That will never do,” said the Boers. “We 
must get them out of there.” 

Twenty or thirty of them collected, and, hid- 
ing behind stones, fired, in part at the new point, 
in part at the mountain top. Pieter and five 
others, however, crept to one side, behind blocks 
of stone, in order to catch the enemy from the 
other side. The English were crouching behind 
stones and earth, and soon Pieter saw their red 
coats and blue jackets. There were perhaps 


294 


THE BOER BOY 


fifty of them, commanded by a marine officer. 
They shot at the Boers in the ravine, but Pieter 
noticed they had difficulty in holding their posi- 
tion, continually ducking to avoid the rain of 
bullets. Now Pieter’s little troop began its fire 
from concealment. The officer fell first ; with 
him sank five other men, and terror seized all. 
They sprang up when they realized that they 
were caught at the side, and, furious, a little 
troop of the brave sailors rushed forward, while 
the others retreated. But scarcely had they ad- 
vanced a hundred steps when half of them fell 
to the ground, and the others rushed back, 
terrified. Exposed to the fire of the Boers in 
the ravine, and to this other group, few of them 
survived to reach the mountain top again. 

“ Now forward, and after them ! ” cried Pieter. 
“We can reach the edge of the height.” 

They rushed forward with glowing faces 
blackened with dust and powder, guns in hand, 
clambering over jn-ickly bushes and rocks. 
Shots cracked round about them and powder 
smoke veiled the cliff. The men in the ravine 
joined Pieter and his companions, and the crowd 
pressed forward, while the fire from above was 
almost silenced. On they pressed, eager for 


THE STORMING OF MAJUBA 


295 


battle and drunk with victory, over the bodies 
of the enemy lying oil the slope, and reached 
the summit. Pieter was the first who reached 
the rock-bordered edge. With loud, wild cries 
the Boers rushed on, the last defenders flying 
before them, and intrenched themselves on the 
edge which surrounded this side of the plateau 
like a bulwark. 

Then they saw what work their guns had 
done. Dead bodies lay about them, and the 
wounded groaned on the ground. Several 
English soldiers kneeled behind the breastwork 
as if alive, guns in hand, the shot in the head 
having killed them so suddenly that they had 
not changed their position. Pieter saw the old 
Scotchman who had predicted the death of the 
General. He lay as if alive, and Pieter won- 
dered to see no wound on him. But when he 
lifted the helmet from his head a stream of 
blood rushed forth ; a shot in the head had 
killed him and the hat had held back the blood. 
Almost all who lay here were killed by shots in 
the head. 

From this position, Pieter could see over the 
whole plateau. It was very large and could hold 
many thousand men. The farther slope could 


296 


THE BOER BOY 


not be seen distinctly because of tbe distance 
and tbe powder smoke that veiled the whole 
mountain top. 

But the English troops over there could be 
seen, and Pieter knew that the victory was al- 
most certain to be with the Boers. He and the 
men with him began to fire at the distant red- 
coats. 

Diagonally across the plateau ran a deep de- 
pression whose ravines and heights offered the 
English protection against the Boers who had 
reached the summit. But the battle was a des- 
perate one for the English, now attacked on two 
sides. From the east the Boers came up slowly, 
driving the defenders from the edge, and from 
the north, where stood Pieter, the balls came 
from the plateau itself. As Pieter pushed for- 
ward with his comj)anions he saw the English 
soldiers — highlanders, sailors, and men of other 
regiments — running confusedly, while officers, 
revolver and sword in hand, vainly tried to stop 
the fugitives. It was a terrible scene. Now 
from the east side the broad hats came clamber- 
ing over the mountain’s edge. For an instant 
Pieter saw General Colley himself. He stood 
in the midst of a group of soldiers, revolver in 


THE STORMING OF M A JUBA 


297 


liia right hand, as if to command. He stood 
proudly, bravely, as if he, like the rock in the 
breakers, would also offer resistance to the flood. 
But in the next instant his hands sank, his 
helmet fell from his head, he fell, and the sol- 
diers about him sank down as if mowed to the 
ground. The powerful forms of the Boers now 
appeared everywhere. 

Pieter sprang over dead and dying and has- 
tened to the side of the plateau down which the 
English fled. On the same side up which they 
had slowly and wearily climbed they now 
rushed down in mad haste. The guns behind 
them seemed to lend them wings, deadly fear 
impelled them forward. Pieter could shoot no 
more. Sympathy and pity chained his hands. 
He saw the English springing from rock to 
rock, many breaking their necks in headlong 
falls, others their limbs in the deep holes ; many 
struck in the back by balls from the Boers, who 
now stood in a long chain on the summit, firing 
at everything in uniform. It was a terrible 
sight to see a fugitive in full flight struck by a 
ball, spread out his arms with a piercing cry, 
and fall forward. 

Not only the troops above, but those left 


298 


THE BOER BOY 


below, suffered from the deadly fire. Pieter 
saw the hussars in wild flight. From where 
he stood they looked no larger than grass- 
hoppers scattered in mad chase over the green 
grass, the crowd of Boers behind them — a 
division sent by Joubert around the mountain. 
Pieter turned and looked over the plateau. 
Victory — complete victory ! Perhaps a hundred 
soldiers stood prisoners ; all the rest were dead 
or hunted down the slope. Desolation and 
death crowned Majuba. Everywhere death, 
everywhere wounded men, everywhere blood, 
everywhere shrieks and groans. The officers 
and soldiers lay dead about their dead General, 
and the victorious Boers covered the plateau. 
Pieter went about among them, inquiring after 
friends and relatives ; it seemed miraculous that 
of all the Boers, but one was killed and six 
were wounded. “ What a victory !” cried the 
Boer boy, “ what a victory !” 

General Wood came, but he brought peace, 
not a renewal of hostilities. England was at 
last willing to recognize the justice of the claims 
of the Transvaal. 

From mouth to mouth the joyful tidings were 
carried in the Boer army, and joyful excitement 


THE STORMING OF MAJUBA 


299 


seized the daring men who had staked their 
lives for the freedom of their fatherland. They 
collected in groups and exulted; they surrounded 
their elders and gave thanks to God, who had 
given them the victory. From Heidelberg and 
Pretoria men hastened to the camp, and wives 
and daughters hurried to their husbands and 
fathers to thank them for their valor. 

While this tumult of joy filled the camp, 
Pieter swung himself on Jager’s back and lifted 
the waving vier-klor high in the air above the 
huzzaing multitude. 

“ Long live the Transvaal ! Long live the 
South African Republic !” he cried with a 
strong voice, which was echoed a thousandfold 
by those about him. 

As he shouted thus, a light vehicle rolled up, 
showing within the shrewd face and white 
beard that Pieter had once seen at Bloemfontein. 
President Johannes Brand came to serve as a 
mediator between English and Boers. 

“ Long live the Boers !” cried Pieter, waving 
the flag. General Joubert noticed the smile 
with which President Brand recognized the 
boy. 

“ One of our best fighters,’’ said he. “ Pieter 


300 


THE BOEft BOY 


has a good voice. He cried just as loud on 
Majuba as lie cries now over the victory. We 
owe him many thanks — his fatherland is greatly 
indebted to him.” 

Pieter blushed for happiness and pride, and 
the blush increased as a pretty girl rode toward 
him, one whom he recognized at once as the 
chestnut-haired girl he had met at Pretoria 
and had never quite forgotten in all the stress of 
battle. She rode up with a charming smile and 
took a red rose from her breast. 

“ To the victor,” said she, giving him the 
flower. “Take this rose as a token of the 
thanks that we women of Transvaal give to the 
protectors of our fatherland.” 

Pieter took the rose with a joy lie had never 
known before. 

Then his eyes fell on a red uniform, among 
the ranks of the Boers, and a gloomy, sad face. 
Lord Fitzherbert, his prisoner, had approached 
President Brand. 

“Oh, Adolphus, not this sad face/’ cried 
Pieter. “ I am so happy that I would willingly 
share my joy with you. Let me not lose your 
friendship, even though fate has not given your 
country the victory.” Springing from his 


THE STORMING OF M A JUBA 


301 


horse, he handed his flag to a countryman and 
threw his arm about the Englishman. 

“ Do not be angry, Adolphus,” he pleaded. 
“ Do not deprive me of your friendship on 
this happy day.” 

As the Englishman tried to shake himself 
free and was yet touched by his friend’s request, 
he stopped suddenly and looked before him, 
astonished. Pieter, following his look, gave a 
cry of glad surprise. The crowd parted, and 
the old missionary stood before them, the mild 
light of his earnest, kind eyes beaming on 
them. 

“ I see you arm in arm, in spite of battle and 
blood,” said he, “ and I trust that your friend- 
ship, which has endured through the war, is a 
good sign for peace. If human love is so strong, 
how much more may the love of God prevail ! 
So may the peoples whose blood has reddened 
the soil of Africa become reconciled, and in 
the light of Christianity this land may become 
a blessed field for the seed of the Divine 
Word.” 


CHAPTER XXIX 


dr. jameson's raid 

The years sped by, and tlie charming girl 
who gave Pieter the rose as the reward of vic- 
tory became his wife. They were married in 
the church at Pretoria by the old missionary, 
who soon after passed away. 

From his father-in-law Pieter received a 
large tract of land south of Pretoria, on the 
southern slope of Witwater's Rand. The land 
was well adapted to horse-breeding as well as 
agriculture, and his horses soon became famous 
throughout the country. But Pieter did not 
long remain here. Changes were taking place 
in this region which induced him, soon after his 
marriage, to return the property to his father- 
in-law. 

In the neighborhood of Witwater’s Rand — 
so Pieter told him, when asked his reasons — 
and Gat's Rand, directly south, a number of 
302 


dr. Jameson’s raid 


303 


English, and also Germans, French, and Italians, 
who did nothing by the way of stock-raising or 
agriculture, but were simply gold-diggers, had 
formed a little settlement called Johannes- 
burg. They did not find the gold in veins or 
nuggets, but had to sift the earth, wash it with 
lye, crush the ore and melt it, in order to get 
the gold-dust, and, in consequence, could not 
dig alone, but must form companies and use 
machinery. If in a ton of earth they found an 
ounce of gold they were satisfied, but often 
they found five, six, or even ten ounces to 
the ton. These people, whom the Boers called 
Uitlanders, Pieter did not like, and when, one 
day, a number of them offered to buy his prop- 
erty, he said he would think over it, and mount- 
ing his horse, rode to Pretoria to his father-in- 
law. 

“ How much have they offered you ?” asked 
the latter. 

Pieter named a large amount. 

“ It is worth it. But you could get half as 
much again, for just where your house stands 
the exchange will be built, and it is probable 
that in a few years Johannesburg will become an 
important city.” 


804 


THE BOER BOY 


“ But, father/’ said Pieter, “ the money does 
not belong to me, but to you, who gave me the 
land/’ 

“ Don’t worry about that. I have much more 
money than you, and the Uitlanders are able 
to pay it.” 

“ That may be,” replied Pieter, thoughtfully, 
“ but the gold and the Uitlanders will yet be the 
ruin of us. It is not by any means a blessing 
to the republic that gold has been found here. 
Yesterday I went hunting with five young men 
from the country, and I observed that they can- 
not shoot. The Boers think too much of gold 
and of business. But what maintains the re- 
jmblic is not business and not gold, but guns.” 

“ There is some truth in that,” rejdied his 
father-in-law, “ but the course of affairs cannot 
be checked. We cannot hinder the Uitlanders 
from coming among us. We can only take care 
that they do not get the upper hand in the re- 
public. Only yesterday I talked with Oom 
Paul of this, and he assured me that so long as 
he was President the Uitlanders should have no 
voice in the Government. And consider, my 
son, that the Uitlanders make us rich. They 
must pay heavy taxes, they and their gold com- 


dr. Jameson's raid 


305 


pauies. The President lias given a heavy order 
to Krupp, the German, for cannon and ammu- 
nition, which will be paid for with the Uit- 
landers’ money. If our young people do not 
shoot so well as they used, we shall at least 
have artillery instead." 

Pieter shook his head. “ When I was twelve 
years old I was too late for dinner one day," he 
said. “ I was hungry, and when I asked for 
meat my father said, ‘ Here, take your gun and 
shoot yourself something for dinner.’ But now 
one has to go too far to find wild animals. 
Trekking has ceased, and the young men are 
unused to the chase. And if our young people 
are effeminate, we shall have a difficult position 
to hold against the English. Who are theUit- 
landers? Most of them are English, and in 
time they will get us into difficulty with the 
Government of Cape Colony and Natal. The 
English will want to take our country from us 
if so much gold is found in it. On that account 
I shall have nothing to do with the gold and the 
Uitlanders." 

In spite of his father-in-law’s protestations, 
Pieter remained firm in his refusal to take the 
mining company’s money, and finally accepted 


20 


306 


THE BOER BOY 


instead another tract of land that lay on the 
western frontier, north of Mafeking. 

Here Pieter dwelt contentedly ; his mother 
lived with him and his unmarried brothers, 
who were of great assistance with the horses and 
ostriches. His sisters, who were all married, 
also lived near-by, and the whole family were 
always reunited at holiday seasons. 

They were all sitting together in the largest 
room of Pieter’s house, which could hardly hold 
them, on Christmas Hay, 1895, but their voices 
were not so cheerful as on former occasions, for 
disquieting rumors had reached them of troubles 
at Johannesburg, and of the Government’s 
measures to quiet the Uitlanders. Johannes- 
burg had become a city of more than a hundred 
thousand inhabitants, and the exchange had 
really been built on the place where Pieter’s 
house had stood. 

As they talked together of these things, a 
young man galloped up, who proved to be young 
Cronje, son of Commander Cronje, at Johan- 
nesburg. 

“ My father sends me,” said he, “ to say that 
he has no confidence in the peace. On the 
frontier here, near you, at Pitsani Potlugo, the 


dr, jameson’s raid 


307 


administrator of Nyassaland, Dr. Jameson, is 
collecting troops. It is feared that he is in 
communication with the Reform Committee in 
Johannesburg, and that a conspiracy against 
the State is on foot. My father thinks that you 
are in a position to get information concerning 
Dr. Jameson’s troops and his designs.” 

Pieter nodded. “ I have seen Dr. Jim 
and his camp,” said he. “ He is a shrewd fel- 
low, a little man, with broad head and little, 
sparkling eyes. I went over to see him because 
he wanted to buy horses of me, but I did not 
sell him any. Tell your father I know accu- 
rately how large a force there is at Pitsani. Dr. 
Jim has six hundred and fifty horsemen in camp, 
in part police troops from Bechuanaland, in part 
Rhodesia cavalry. Besides, he has a twelve- 
pounder, two seven-pounders, and eight Maxim 
guns. There are, also, about a hundred Kafirs 
in camp, who are armed and ride the reserve 
horses. Among his people are a number of 
British officers, and, in my opinion, that indi- 
cates clearly what Dr. Jim’s design is. Tell 
your father I was in Pretoria three days ago, 
and told General Joubert all I knew.” 

“ What did he say ?” 


308 


THE BOER BOY 


“ Very little. But our duty is clear. Fifteen 
years ago we had to defend ourselves against 
the troops of the Queen. It is not the Queen 
in England who attacks us now, but we have a 
king in Africa itself, Cecil Rhodes, who will 
transact as private business what the Queen 
may not transact for the State. He came here 
ten years ago to cure himself of consumption, 
and to-day he has a property of fifteen mill- 
ion pounds sterling, and as president of the 
Chartered Company is the real ruler of the 
British colonies in South Africa. His brother 
is at the head of the Reform Committee at 
Johannesburg, and Dr. Jameson holds forces 
ready on the border to support the Uitlanders 
when the Reform Committee has incited them 
to insurrection. Tell your father to rest assured 
that I will keep him informed of what is going 
on.” 

Hereupon Pieter and young Cronje mounted 
and rode southeast over the border into Becliu- 
analand. They passed Mafeking to the left, and 
after an hour’s ride reached a height from which 
they could see Dr. Jameson’s camp. Several 
groups of white tents stood in the brown fields, 
and near them were several long sheds in which 


DR. JAMESON*S RAID 


309 


Pieter said the artillery and the greater part of 
the horses were kept. All was quiet and the 
two Boers rode away. 

On Sunday evening, December 29th, 1895, a 
circle of athletic-looking men, in undress uni- 
form and smoking short jfipes, were sitting in 
Dr. Jameson’s tent at Pitsani Potlugo, discuss- 
ing the contents of a letter he had just read 
aloud to them. 

“What is your opinion, Willoughby ?” asked 
he. “ Every day different news and different 
orders. Now they telegraph that we shall 
march, now they advise to wait. Now they say 
the Boers have wind of our plans and our coun- 
trymen at Johannesburg are in danger. Do 
you think the right time has come ?” 

Major Sir John Willoughby, commander of 
the troops of the Chartered Company, a strong 
man, who at first glance would have passed for 
a youth of twenty, laughed. “ The right time,” 
said he, “ is the time when we will be 
successful.” 

“ Yes, yes,” said Dr. Jameson. “ Success turns 
the scale. If we conquer, we are deliverers and 
heroes. If we are defeated, we are robbers and 
scoundrels. You command the troops, Wil- 


310 


TIIE BOER BOY 


lougliby — do you tliink we are strong enough to 
march on Johannesburg ?” 

“ I think we are strong enough ,” replied Wil- 
loughby ; “ but in all cases we must protect the 
rear. On that account I would not lead the 
people were I in your place, Jameson. Call 
out volunteers — then the thing has no official 
character. We will get through if we set about 
it in the right way.” 

“ And what is the right way ?” 

“ March according to all campaign rules and 
shoot down all who block the way.” 

“ No, that would not be wise,” said Dr. Jam- 
eson. “ That would horrify everybody, and our 
own philanthropic press in London would protest 
against' such barbarism. We must get to Jo- 
hannesburg without shedding blood, if possible, 
and we can do so if we are only quick enough. 
If we conducted a regular campaign, it would 
be necessary to supply ourselves with provisions, 
and we have no time for that. This letter proves 
that haste is necessary. The Boers will surround 
Johannesburg. If they do, we will be too late. 
We must appear unexpectedly in the city if we 
are to get the upper hand. The majority of the 
people are on our side, even though a few hundred 


dr. jameson’s raid 


311 


Germans have offered their services to the Gov- 
ernment against us. Two thousand volunteers 
will join us, they promise, as soon as we come 
in sight of Johannesburg.” 

“ Dr. Jim is right,” said Colonel White. 
“ Haste is necessary.” 

“ We will not use ceremony with the Boers,” 
added Colonel Scott. “ They are greatly over- 
valued, simply because they surprised our 
weak divisions at Laing’s Nek and Majuba. 
The Government’s forbearance is unendurable. 
It is so in India as well. When a band of rob- 
bers choose to murder our outposts they can do 
it. Then the Government comes and says to the 
leader of the band : ^ It is not right that you 
should murder our soldiers. Promise that you 
will not do it again and we will give you ten 
thousand pounds.’ ” 

“ Bravo 1” cried the others. 

“ The Boers are a heavenly herd,” said Cap- 
tain Thatcher, “ a new chosen people. Jehovah 
himself has intended them to rule in Trans- 
vaal forever, all teaching of history to the con- 
trary. These cunning Dutch intend to make 
of Transvaal a spear to be thrown into the heart 
of our African possessions. If our patience 


312 


THE BOER BOY 


endures, we shall live to see Dutch soldiers come 
to Africa to protect Dutch subjects, and where 
the Teuton’s foot is once planted it is never 
lifted up. To that will the wisdom of the Gov- 
ernment yet bring us. What ! shall the Govern- 
ment dictate from London what is to be done in 
Africa? Whenever affairs have been mis- 
managed in India, it has always been proved to 
be the fault of the Secretary of State. The 
governors in the colonies should be independent.” 

“Well, gentlemen,” said Dr. Jameson, “I 
think we are clear on the subject. We will ride 
to-morrow. I will call for volunteers for the 
ride early, and we will in that way avoid giving 
the expedition an official character. We will 
take only two days’ provisions with us, for either 
we will get to Johannesburg before a Boer 
power has assembled against us or our expedition 
will be a total failure. But how can the Boers, 
scattered as they are on isolated farms, collect 
so quickly ? And if only we get to Johannes- 
burg first, we shall have things in our own 
hands. Once the Reform Committee has a 
couple of hundred determined men at its back, 
it can take a different attitude toward President 
Kruger.” 


dr. jameson’s raid 


313 


“ And I do not think,” added Colonel White, 
“ that there is a man in the camp who will not 
go with you as a volunteer. The weal and woe 
of English women and children are concerned. 
If there is an uprising at Johannesburg, the 
wives and children of our countrymen are with- 
out protection against the brutality of these 
Boers, whose piety is but a slight varnish.” • 

“ They are like the old Jews,” said Captain 
Thatcher, “ who desired only the circumcision 
of the Canaan ites, and then, in spite of it, de- 
stroyed them, root and branch, for God’s glory.” 

Early on the morning of December 30tli, 
bugles sounded in the camp at Pitsani, the riders 
mounted, the artillery put horses to the guns, 
the Kafirs made ready the reserve horses. The 
police troops of Bechuanaland, the cavalry of 
Rhodesia, and all the officers in the camp as- 
sembled. They were no such troops as General 
Colley had led against the Boers — no young 
soldiers, little practiced in shooting, but tested, 
powerful men, mounted on excellent horses, 
which, like their riders, were accustomed to the 
climate and the nature of the soil. 

The police troops were dressed in brown 
khaki, the Rhodesia riders in gray uniform ; all 


314 


THE BOER BOY 


wore the torai, the broad-brimmed felt hat, turned 
up on the left side, but shading the right eye 
for aiming. They also wore leather cartridge 
belts and carried magazine guns. 

Dr. Jameson, in a long brown coat with velvet 
collar, unarmed and carrying only a field glass, 
rode before the front and drew a paper from his 
pocket. 

“ Gentlemen and dear friends,” cried he, “ I 
have a communication here which lias come 
from our countrymen at Johannesburg. It is a 
call for help — a cry against oppression. Kruger 
and his people have evil designs. Our men can 
take care of themselves, but the women and 
children are in peril. If it comes to bloodshed, 
we fear that the Boers will not spare the defense- 
less. I will say no more. Time presses, and 
you know me. I need a handful of determined 
fellows, who will ride with me to Johannesburg 
to help our countrymen. Those of you who so 
desire, and are not lacking in courage, say so, 
and follow me.” 

“ Hurrah ! Hurrah for Dr. Jim !” came 
thunderingly from the squadron, and soon the 
whole company started, under the leadership of 
Willoughby. 


dr. jameson’s raid 


315 


At the same time two riders, unobserved by 
the English troops, left the hill south of the 
camp and galloped to the frontier. They rode 
swift horses from Pieter Maritz’s stables, and 
while the English column wound slowly through 
the fields to the east, with guns and wagons, Pieter 
and young Cronje had already arrived at Otters- 
boop and announced to Commander Cronje and 
President Kruger that Dr. Jameson, with his 
troops, was on the march. 

An hour later the advance riders of the 
English reached Ottersboop, and the inhabit- 
ants of the place, which formed the middle 
point of the rich gold fields of Malmai, looked 
on curiously as Dr. Jameson directed the cutting 
of the wires before continuing on his way to the 
east. 

Progress was slow. The cavalry galloped for- 
ward from time to time, but had to wait again 
for the artillery and wagons. Then all must 
stop for a few hours to rest the draught animals. 

Toward evening on December 31st, a mes- 
senger, his horse covered with foam, overtook 
the column and handed Dr. Jameson a dispatch 
from Sir Hercules Robinson, upper commissary 
of the Queen at Cape Town. 


285 


THE BOER BOY 


316 

“ Altogether my view,” said Dr. Jameson to 
some of the officers. “I think he lias said what 
he thought he ought to say, and now that we 
have heard we will proceed.” 

He stuck the paper in his pocket and sent the 
messenger back. 

An hour later a rider wearing the uniform 
of a Transvaal police officer approached the 
column. 

“ What do you want?” asked Dr. Jameson. 
“ Who are you ?” 

“ My name is Eloff,” replied the man, “and 
in my capacity as an officer of Krugersdorp I 
ask you, in the name of the law, why this armed 
body of men has entered the territory of the 
republic ?” 

“ That will soon become apparent,” said Dr. 
Jameson, smiling. “By way of preliminary, 
give up your gun and follow the column as our 
prisoner.” 

“ Give up my gun !” exclaimed the officer. 

“ Don’t be worried ; we slia’n’t steal it,” cried 
Dr. Jameson, laughing. “You can have it 
back at Pretoria. Bide with us.” 

The officer’s gun was taken, and he joined the 
riders at the rear. 


DR. JAMESONS RAID 


317 


Not long after this another rider appeared, 
rising as suddenly as if the brown field had 
produced him by magic. He dashed directly 
in the way of Dr. Jameson. 

“ I ought to know this man,” said Dr. Jame- 
son to the officers near him. 

“ Dr. Jameson, if I am not mistaken,” said 
the Boer in the purest English, lifting his hat. 

“ Quite correct. And, if I am not mistaken, 
you are Mr. Buurman.” 

“I am he. The military commander of 
Marico district sends by me his orders that you 
at once leave the territory of the republic/’ 

“ And if I refuse to do so?” 

“Dr. Jameson,” said Pieter, “you will meet 
an armed force if you do not turn back. You 
invade the country in times of peace, without a 
previous declaration of war. The commander 
says to you that the blood shed will rest on your 
head.” 

“ Let us hope that there will be no bloodshed,” 
replied Dr. Jameson. “ Give up your gun, Mr. 
Buurman, and follow us at the rear, where you 
will find a countryman.” 

“ I urge you earnestly, Dr. Jameson, turn 
back !” cried Pieter Maritz. 


318 


THE BOER BOY 


“ Hold his horse and take his gun,” cried Dr. 
Jameson to some of the soldiers. 

The men sprang forward, but before they 
reached Pieter he had turned his horse around 
and in a few seconds was out of reach. Two of 
the men lifted their guns, but Dr. Jameson 
forbade them to fire. 

“ A very fine man and a very fine horse,” 
said he. “ If I recall rightly, he is one of the 
old soldiers and a friend of several of our offi- 
cers in the Zulu war.” 

“ I do not like this,” said Willoughby. “ I 
think we will get to see more of the Boers than 
we had expected.” 

The march continued into the night, for the 
leaders were anxious to proceed. Time was 
pressing, and a long distance still lay between 
them and Johannesburg. 

Just at midnight, as the moon was shining 
brightly, the advance guard reached a height 
which stretched diagonally across the road like 
a horseshoe. As they rode forward, lights flashed 
from a dozen places on the dark hills, and the 
crackling of firearms was heard. 

The advance guard hastened back, and soon 
the Maxim guns were brought up. Thousands 


dr. jameson’s raid 


319 


of balls whistled against the hills, but it could 
not be seen whether or not they were effective. 
Yet presently the Boer fire withdrew from the 
right to the left wing, and gradually ceased 
altogether. 

The English column suffered no loss, but had 
had two hours’ delay. After a half-hour’s 
advance they went into camp for the night, and 
when day dawned, the first day of the year 
1896, they arose and prepared for the march, 
suffering greatly from lack of water. Nothing 
was seen of the Boers, and toward noon they 
reached a solitary inn, where man and beast re- 
freshed themselves, and after two hours’ rest, 
continued the march. 

Now the plain gradually rose to a height 
about five hundred feet above the inn. When 
the advance guard reached the height it became 
apparent that the Boers had made ready for the 
reception of their guests. From trenches and 
behind blocks of stone a heavy fire broke forth 
and several Englishmen fell. 

The Maxim guns were brought up and firing 
began ; a part of the riders dismounted and 
sought cover for shooting. Fortunately, how- 
ever, no Boer could be seen ; only here and 


320 


THE BOER BOY 


there a liat-brim showed over the edge of stone 
or walls. The fight continued for an hour ; then 
the Boers’ fire stopped and they retired. The 
English, following, reached the heights and saw 
the last Boers running through the valley, on 
the other side of which lay a second height from 
which came shots. 

Dr. Jameson looked at the battlefield through 
his field glass. Shots came from a house covered 
with sheet-iron on the height. Not far off 
stood a wooden frame-work which seemed to be 
built over mining shafts, and there stood a 
number of miners, who were not armed and 
were only spectators of the battle. 

“ Behind the heights lies Krugersdorp,” said 
Willoughby, “ and if we continue the fight by 
firing the town we can cause the Boers to re- 
treat.” 

“ That we will not do in any case,” said 
Dr. Jameson. “ On the contrary, we will 
take care that not a grenade by any accident 
falls in the village. I only hope that our friends 
in Johannesburg will come to meet us, and that 
the Boers will then retire. Too much blood has 
been shed already.” 

“ There is nothing for it but to fight,” said 


dr. jameson’s raid 


321 


Colonel White. “ The exjiedition is a failure ; 
but at least the Boers shall not have it to say 
that we have shown ourselves cowards.” 

“We will draw around to the right flank, 
fighting, and surround the Boers, in that way 
getting back of Krugersdorp and on the direct 
road to Johannesburg,” said Willoughby, giv- 
ing directions to the men. 

This movement was made as soon as it be- 
came dark, and they succeeded in getting around 
Krugersdorp. Yet in the last minutes before 
complete darkness fell, the Boers made use of a 
stratagem that cost the English several men. 
The Boers appeared suddenly in a long line 
outside their covering, their forms distinctly 
visible against the evening sky. Made impatient 
by the cautious defensive fight which had 
already lasted six hours, Willoughby let three 
hundred of the swiftest riders make an attack 
in a gallop. As they rushed forward the Boers 
disappeared and again opened a hot fire from 
the trenches, under which several of the English 
fell and the rest hastily retreated. 

The English now drew back and went into 
camp. They suffered greatly from lack of food 
and water, and the realization that their un- 


21 


322 


THE BOER BOY 


dertaking was a failure. The wounded were to 
be brought into the camp, against which the 
Boers in the distance kept up a constant fire. 
In the morning twilight the men arose and pre- 
pared for battle. The wagons were left in the 
camp and the men were led still further to the 
right ; an unfortunate movement it proved, as it 
led them directly into the trap placed by the 
Boers. 

The English were now in the Doom Kop 
Valley, surrounded on three sides by heights 
that were occupied by Boers. Now for the first 
time the English guns were answered by artil- 
lery fire from the Boers. 

Already in utter despair, the English trained 
their Maxim guns upon the hill from which 
came the heaviest fire. But soon the horses 
were shot down and the guns could not be 
moved. The cannon of the Boers did no harm, 
as all the balls struck the ground. But about 
eleven o’clock in the morning Dr. Jameson and 
his officers gave up all hope of advancing, and 
even of retreating. A soldier’s white shirt was 
tied to a gun and waved in token of surrender. 

Shortly after, the Boers’ fire ceased and the 
English, for the most part, stretched themselves 


dr. jameson’s raid 


323 


oil the ground and awaited their fate in gloomy 
silence, completely exhausted from lack of food 
and exertion. Many of the weary men fell 
asleep immediately. 

Dr. Jameson, accompanied by some officers 
and the man with the flag, rode slowly forward 
to meet several riders who came down the hill, 
among them, too, a man carrying a white flag. 
With them was a wliite-bearded man of austere 
appearance, who, Dr. Jameson learned, was 
Commander Cronje, and near him rode the 
same Mr. Buurman who had warned them 
against marching forward. 

“ What do you want ?” asked Cronje, after 
they had met. 

“ We want to end the hostilities,” replied Dr. 
Jameson. 

“ You should not have begun them,” said the 
commander. “ But if you surrender at dis- 
cretion, I will forbid my people further bat- 
tle.” 

Dr. Jameson’s eyes blazed. “At discretion ?” 
he cried. “ Never ! We desire unhindered re- 
treat, with horses, arms, and baggage, over the 
frontier, or else we will continue the fight.” 

“ That would be bad for you,” said Cronje. 


324 


THE BOER BOY 


“ Consider what you are doing. Look ! You 
are surrounded by our guns.” 

“ Do not forget, commander,” said Jameson, 
“ that we also have friends. If we continue the 
fight, our friends at Johannesburg will hear the 
thunder of the cannon and come to our 
assistance.” 

“Your friends at Johannesburg are near by, 
it is true,” said Pieter, to whom Cronje looked. 
“ I saw them half an hour ago. But they satis- 
fied themselves with being spectators.” 

“ Are they in the neighborhood ?” 

“ A hundred of them came out of the city 
and looked this way. But don’t have the 
slightest hope of their assistance,” replied Pieter. 
“ If you wish it, and the commander will per- 
mit, I will lead you up the hill, and you can see 
for yourself that they are not thinking of battle.” 

Dr. Jameson looked searcliingly at the Boers 
and then inquiringly at his companions. Wil- 
loughby shook his head. 

“ It is clear to me that we are left in the 
lurch,” said he. 

“ In no case will we surrender at discretion,” 
reiterated Dr. Jameson, turning to the com- 
mander. 


dr. jameson’s raid 


325 


“ I promise,” said Cronje, “ that the lives of 
officers as well as men shall be spared. As for 
yourself, Dr. Jameson, you will be given over 
to the authorities at Pretoria, who will decide 
your case.” 

“ I am indifferent as to what concerns me 
personally,” said Dr. Jameson. “ I wish only a 
guarantee for the lives of my people, and, since 
you promise that, we will surrender.” 

“ It is well,” said Cronje. 

“ And now give us an opportunity to pur- 
chase food and drink,” said Dr. Jameson, “ for 
we are starving, and that is the real reason for 
our surrender.” 

Commander Cronje sent back his compan- 
ions, and soon crowds of Boers came galloping 
down the hills, giving cries of exultation and 
swinging their guns. They hurried up to the 
English and shared their bread and meat with 
the exhausted men. So heartfelt was their 
sympathy, so hearty their hospitality, and so 
determined their refusal of pay for the food that 
the Englishmen gazed at them in astonishment. 

Pieter approached Dr. Jameson, who still sat 
downcast on his horse, and offered him food, 
which he refused. 


326 


THE BOER BOY 


“ So our countrymen in Johannesburg satisfied 
themselves with looking on ?” he asked. 

“ They could not do otherwise/’ replied Pieter. 
“ We would not let them.” 

“ And what will the Boers say of us ? They 
will laugh at us.” 

“ We do not laugh over bloodshed,” said 
Pieter, gravely. 

“You have many losses? How many dead 
and wounded have you ?” 

“ I do not know,” replied Pieter. “ But I saw 
my friend, Commander Cronje’s son, fall.” 

“I regret it,” replied Dr. Jameson. “My 
plan was not built on bloodshed. I hoped to 
reach Johannesburg without battle.” 

“Your plan failed, Dr. Jameson, for either 
one carries on war or remains at peace. There 
is no middle way, as your present condition 
shows you.” 

“ We did not think of war. Our intention 
was to protect our countrymen, and we would 
not have shot first.” 

“ The time when British troops can march 
into this country and build camps and forts at 
Pretoria is passed, Dr. Jameson. We regard 
foreign troops that march into our territory as 


dr. jameson’s raid 


327 


enemies. Cecil Rhodes is mistaken if lie thinks 
himself able to carry on speculations of the 
Chartered Company with armed men without 
our protesting against it in arms as soon as the 
territory of the South African Republic comes 
into question.” 

Dr. Jameson was silent. 

Commander Cronje gave orders to lead away 
the disarmed squadron. A long column was 
formed, and on both sides of the English rode 
ranks of Boers, guns in hand, Dr. Jameson and 
the officers being carefully guarded. So the 
little train of victors and vanquished started 
north toward Pretoria. 

Pieter, however, rode with some friends to 
Johannesburg. The region was full of armed 
Boers, and the city itself surrounded on all 
sides. Everywhere mounted men held them- 
selves ready to open fire in case the Uitlanders 
attempted to go to the aid of Dr. Jameson’s 
troops. But no such thought was in* their 
minds. The Boers’ victory had dampened their 
zeal. Pieter saw, indeed, divisions of several 
hundred men before the city, and even in the 
city itself, but they lacked a leader who pos- 
sessed the courage and skill to lead them to the 


328 


THE BOER BOY 


attack. The leaders of the seditious movement 
were rich men who wished neither to hazard 
their fortunes nor their lives. So the thousands 
of men who formed the adherents of the great 
English owners of the gold mines and specu- 
lators wandered about the streets, confused and 
without counsel. 

But there were other armed men besides the 
armed adherents of the Reform Committee. 
Several hundred Germans collected about the 
Town Hall as defenders of the Government, and 
formed dense groups who stood ready to ward 
off an attack. One of these, a friend, Mr. 
Becker, from Dresden, stepped out and shook 
hands with Pieter. His manly face glowed with 
confidence. 

<£ We will not desert you,” said he. “We 
Germans will support the Government.” 

Pieter thanked him and went into the hall, 
where the Government officials were at their 
posts prepared for the worst. But no acts of 
violence occurred. The Uitlanders were de- 
pressed by their defeat. 

Soon new courage and confidence came to the 
Government of the Boer State, who, in spite of 
victory, could not altogether cast off their ap- 


dr. jameson’s raid 


329 


prehensions. The German emperor sent his con- 
gratulations over the sea from Berlin to Pre- 
toria. The emperor’s dispatch to President 
Kruger weighed powerfully in the scales of po- 
litical relations. It aroused great enthusiasm 
over the entire country. The Boer State felt 
itself supported by a great nation, and the Eng- 
lish desisted from the attempt to cover the 
miscarried undertaking of the Chartered Com- 
pany with the shield of State authority. 

Pieter rode back to his farm with proudly 
erect head, and unfurled the vier-klor over the 
roof of his house. 


CHAPTEE XXX 


TO-DAY 

Not long, however, was Pieter Maritz des- 
tined to see the vier-klor wave undisturbed over 
his home. Four years had passed since the 
Jameson raid, and in this time so many Uit- 
landers had been attracted to the Transvaal by 
the richness of the gold fields that they now 
outnumbered the Boers three to one. Their 
insolence increased with their numbers, and 
Pieter shook his head in foreboding when he 
heard of their efforts to gain control of the 
Government. 

One afternoon, late in the spring of 1899, he 
rode home from a distant part of his farm to 
find his brothers in great excitement over the 
news that had just reached them of a petition 
to the English Government, signed by twenty- 
one thousand Uitlanders, and also by Sir Alfred 
330 


TO-DAY 


331 


Milner, Governor of Cape Colony and High Com- 
missioner for South Africa, for assistance in 
securing their rights in the South African 
Republic. The rights, so called, were these : 

1. The right to vote for the real legislative 
authority — the First Chamber of the Volksraad, 
not the impotent Second Chamber. 

2. Such a redistribution of seats for the gold 
fields in the Volksraad as would give them a 
proper representation. 

3. A constitution safeguarded from sudden 
changes. 

4. The heads of the Government responsible 
to the Volksraad. 

5. Independence of the courts. 

6. Cancellation of monopolies. 

7. Equality in recognition by the courts of 
the English and Dutch languages, just as in 
Cape Colony. 

8. Removal of religious disabilities. 

9. Reorganization of the civil service. 

10. A free press. 

11. Proper schools. 

12. Free trade. 

“ This very petition,” exclaimed Pieter, bit- 
terly, “ shows that they still consider themselves 


332 


THE BOER BOY 


British subjects, and yet at the same time they 
wish also to be citizens of the Transvaal. 
Under the treaties of 1881 and of 1884 they 
were given equal privileges and civil rights 
before the law, but political rights were not. 
promised to unnaturalized citizens. But I have 
expected nothing else since the gold was dis- 
covered. I said then that this gold would be 
our ruin ; I say it now. You will see.” And 
he shook his head sadly. 

The next tidings brought to the isolated 
farmhouse were that Sir Alfred Milner and 
President KiTiger had held a conference, in 
which the Governor of Caj^e Colony demanded 
that five years should be sufficient to secure the 
franchise, with a naturalization oath similar to 
that in the Orange Free State, and that Presi- 
dent Kruger had consented to halve the present 
residence of fourteen years, but insisted on 
Great Britain’s abandonment of her claim of 
suzerainty. 

Soon after this came the news that the Volks- 
raad had granted a franchise after seven years’ 
residence, provided Great Britain would abandon 
her claim to suzerainty and pledge herself never 
again to interfere in Transvaal affairs. This 


TO-DAY 


333 


Great Britain refused to do, but proposed a 
joint conference. 

President Kruger next proposed a five years’ 
residence, with abandonment of suzerainty. This 
being refused, he withdrew his proposal, but 
agreed to a conference, provided Great Britain 
would acknowledge the Transvaal as a sovereign 
State. 

This was refused, and in the weeks that fol- 
lowed, friends from Pretoria informed Pieter 
of the tidings that had come to them of Eng- 
land’s preparations for war. Reserve supplies 
and ammunition had been sent to South Africa ; 
General Buller, who was in command of the 
Cape troops, had been ordered to complete ar- 
rangements for transportation of men to the 
front ; police and local forces were to be organ- 
ized at the Cape, and batteries and the Aider- 
shot mounted infantry were ordered to be pre- 
pared to leave for Africa at a moment’s notice. 
After hearing this, Pieter Maritz’s blood boiled 
at the assurance of the Bight Honorable Joseph 
Chamberlain, England’s Colonial Secretary, 
that there was “ no desire to interfere in any 
way with the independence of the South African 
Republic,” and his offer “ to give complete 


334 


THE BOER BOY 


guarantee against any attack upon that inde- 
pendence either from within any part of the 
British dominions or from the territory of a 
foreign State.” 

After this, Pieter, in common with all Boers 
who had fought at Laing’s Nek and Majuba, 
felt that President Kruger was justified in send- 
ing to London, on October 10th, 1899, his ulti- 
matum, demanding : first, that all points of 
mutual difference shall be regulated by diplo- 
macy or arbitration ; second, that all British 
troops on the borders of the Transvaal shall be 
instantly withdrawn ; third, that all reinforce- 
ments of troops that have arrived in South 
Africa since June 1st shall be removed; and 
fourth, that troops now on the seas shall not he 
landed in any part of South Africa. The re- 
fusal to accede to these demands before five 
o’clock of the next day to be regarded by the 
Transvaal Government as a formal declaration 
of war. 

While this was pending, the burghers were 
not idle. Ten thousand men were at Volksrust, 
the nearest town to the Natal border, and three 
thousand more under Cronje were camped neai 
the Becliuana border. President Steyn, of the 



TO FIGHT TO THE DEATH FOR LIBERTY 



























































































































































































































. 

























TO-DAY 


335 


Orange Free State, had replied to Sir Alfred 
Milner’s inquiry that, in accordance with its 
offensive and defensive alliance, the Free State 
must make common cause with the Transvaal. 

Immediately upon the refusal of Great Britain 
to consider the ultimatum, the Transvaal forces, 
joined by the Orange Free State Boers, has- 
tened through the Drakenberg into Natal to 
prevent the concentration of the British forces, 
made some important captures, and shortly laid 
siege to the towns of Ladysmith, Mafeking, and 
Kimberley. 

These things Pieter heard as he was setting 
his affairs in order, that he might join the troops 
under Cronje that were advancing into Bechu- 
analand. This time, however, the thought of 
batt4e did not fill him with the joyful anticipa- 
tion it had of old. He knew the strength of the 
foe ; and the missionary’s words to Cetewayo, 
“ England does not dare to let herself be 
defeated,” repeated themselves over and over to 
him. He had heard Joubert’s words : “ God 
only knows what the end will be. We read in 
all English newspapers of the auxiliary troops 
from all lands and colonies sent to Mr. Cham- 
berlain by Canada, Australia, India, New 


336 


THE BOER BOY 


Zealand, all to help crush the poor little 
band of Boers ; so that unless there be a God 
who desires that they shall live, the name of 
Afrikander will soon be no more spoken.” 

But saddened though he was at the thought 
of the future, Pieter was ready to fight to the 
death for liberty. 

“ As God wills it,” he said as he bade his wife 
farewell. “My father’s last words were a curse 
on our enemy, England. I seem doomed never 
to forget them.” 

His mother handed him his gun. “ And you 
will fight them as a brave man should, Pieter,” 
she cried, her eyes blazing, “ else you are not my 
son. Many a time have I stood by the wagon, axe 
in hand, and hewed down the Kafirs. And 
to-day, old as I am, I would stand in the 
trenches and fight for the country I helped to 
found.” 

“And I !” cried his wife. 

Pieter sprang on his horse and galloped 
swiftly away. When he paused a moment, on a 
distant hill, the little group still stood before the 
house door, and the setting sun gilded the 
waving folds of the vier-klor on the house roof. 


GLOSSARY 


OF 

NATIVE, DUTCH, AND GEOGRAPHICAL 
NAMES 


Acacia Detinens. — The Dutch “ Wacht-een- 
beetje,” or “ wait a little.” The thorns of this 
species of the acacia are shaped like a fish-hook, 
and are so strong that they will sustain a weight of 
seven pounds. 

Agave (a-ga've). — A genus of plants of the 
order amaryllidacese, known as American aloes. 
The plant produces a circle of stiff, erect, fleshy 
leaves, often seven to ten inches long and five to 
seven inches thick at the base, growing on top of a 
short, woody trunk. When the plant has attained 
maturity, it sends forth a stem forty feet high, with 
numerous branches, forming a cylindrical pyramid 
of perfect symmetry. Each branch is crowned with 
a cluster of greenish-yellow branches which con- 
tinue in perfect bloom for several months. 

22 337 


338 


GLOSSARY 


Assagai (as-say-gay). — A light javelin with a 
reed shaft, six feet long, and iron head. The end is 
sometimes ornamented with an ox-tail. 

Avanhou. — Altogether. A native word. 

Baas (Balls). — Master. 

Balebasberge. — A range of mountains in the 
Province of Utrecht. 

Bapedi and Heroro. — Kafir tribes. 

Basutos. — The country of the Basutos lies north 
of Kafirland, between the Winterberg mountains 
and the higher branches of the Orange River. 
They are a tribe of the Bechuanas. The Bakopas 
and Bapedis are Bechuana tribes also. 

Battle Axe. — The battle axe of the Zulus has a 
triangular blade and a handle formed from the 
rhinoceros horn. 

Bechuanas. — The Bechuanas are the most wudely 
distributed and powerful of the native South African 
tribes. They are lively and intelligent, well 
formed, with good features, light copper color and 
short woolly hair. 

Botschabelo. — A mission station founded by a 
German missionary, Merensky, in Eastern Trans- 
vaal, near the Olifants River. 

Buller, Colonel. — Ilis present title is Major-Gen- 
eral Rt. Hon. Sir Redvers Buller, on whose campaign 
in South Africa the eyes of the world have been 
fixed. He is reticent, serious, and seemingly ungra- 


GLOSSARY 


339 


cious in social intercourse, but a man of iron will, 
whose soldierly qualities have been well proven on 
many desperate fields. lie has been a soldier forty- 
one years, having served in China, India, and in 
West Africa against the Ashantis, and in South 
Africa against the Kafirs and Zulus. In this last 
war he won the Victoria Cross for his conspicuous 
bravery. 

Cape Lily. — These magnificent blue lilies are 
said by some travelers to be identical with the 
sacred blue lotus of the Egyptians. 

Cetewayo. — King of the Zulus, and son of 
Panda. 

Drakenberg. — This rugged mountain range 
extends between the Orange Free State and Natal. 

Ekowe. — A village and fort in Zululand, near 
Transvaal border. 

Euphorbia (yu-for-bi-a). — Spurge or bastard 
spurge. A genus of plants of many species. This 
African variety is shrubby and armed with thorns. 

Giraffe-Acacia. — Cameel-doorn. So called be- 
cause it is the favorite food of the giraffe (the 
Dutch cameel), a tall, very hard, slow-growing tree, 
with fern-like leaves. 

Hartebeest. — A species of rare antelope, very 
large and reddish-brown color. Now very rare. 

Hoogte. — A grassy rock-strewn hill. 

Hottentots. — A people of South Africa, in- 


340 


GLOSSARY 


eluding the original inhabitants of the territory 
now occupied by Cape Colony. Their complexion 
is a yellowish-brown, their hair crisp and tufted, 
foreheads narrow, cheek bones projecting, chin 
pointed, body of medium height, skull flat and 
narrow. They are intelligent and courageous, and 
of mild disposition. 

Indunas. — Nobles, men of rank among the Zulus 
and other tribes. 

Joubert, Hon. Petrus Jacobus. — Commandant- 
General of the Transvaal forces and Vice-President 
of the Boer Republic. He is about sixty years of 
age, and is a great-great-grandson of one of the 
Huguenots who fled from religious persecution 
to South Africa. He was born in Congo, Cape 
Colony. He endured hardship in his early life, 
and, after making a little money, became a stock 
farmer in the Transvaal. Before reaching middle 
life he had become rich, and a member of the 
Volksraad. When Sir Theophilus Shepstone an- 
nexed the Transvaal, Mr. Joubert was President 
Kruger’s companion on the mission to London to 
seek retrocession. When war was declared he was 
put in command of the Boer forces. To him was 
due, no doubt, the skillful, tactful use of the guer- 
rilla methods of Boer warfare, eighteen years ago. 
Since then, his power in the state has been second 
only to that of Kruger himself. 


GLOSSARY 


341 


Kafirs. — The Kafirs form one tribe of the great 
Becliuana family. Their national character is bold 
and warlike. At the time of this story there were 
a number of strong Kafir tribes in the Transvaal 
who, having obtained guns, kept themselves free 
and independent. It was in a battle with one of 
these tribes and a community of Trek Boers that 
Andreas Buurman received his fatal wound. 

Kaross. — A fur cloak, in the manufacture of 
which the Bechuanas especially excelled. 

Kemp, Dr. Johann Theodosius Van der. — A 
celebrated Dutch missionary, who went to Cape 
Town in 1799 and settled in Kafirland. As a 
pioneer in the missionary field in this country, 
his perils and privations were indescribable. He 
died in Africa, December 15th, 1811, at an advanced 
age, “ his soul still burning with youthful ardor.” 

Kierie or Kerry. — Sometimes called knob- 
kerry. A club with knob-shaped head. 

Koodoo. — Perhaps the handsomest and most 
characteristic of all South African antelopes. Its 
tall spiral horns are much sought for by hunters. 
Despite its bulk, its speed and activity give it great 
advantages, especially over stalkers on foot. It is 
able to exist for long periods without water. 

Kraal. — A kraal is a collection of huts ar- 
ranged about a circular fence of thorns, which in- 
closes the cattle fold. This fence is eight or ten 


342 


GLOSSARY 


feet high, with a stronger and larger one outside 
the huts, walling the whole. The military kraal 
consists of two hundred or more huts in which are 
quartered the king’s soldiers. The huts are made 
of long wattles or poles, the ends of which are 
fastened in the ground, the tops bent over and 
lashed together with “ monkey rope,” a vine well 
suited for the purpose. 

Kruger, “ Oom Paul,” who is now serving his 
fourth term as President of the Transvaal, is one 
of the most astute, able, determined and diplo- 
matic men among rulers, great or small. His suc- 
cess must be ascribed to his natural ability, for he 
had at the start no better chances than the average 
Boer. He was a successful farmer and trader, and 
gradually built up a fortune estimated at $25,000,- 
000, and has always commanded the esteem and 
confidence of his countrymen in his personal recti- 
tude. 

Luneburg, Fort. — In Southeastern Transvaal. 

Lydenburg. — A city in Eastern Transvaal, near 
the Olifants River. 

Moffat, Robert. — A Scotch missionary, born in 
1795. He went to Namaqualand, South Africa, 
in 1817, and labored there with great success. He 
was the father-in-law of Dr. David Livingstone. His 
work is described in his book, “ Missionary Labors 
and Scenes in South Africa.” (London, 1842.) 


GLOSSARY 


343 


Morimo. — The name used by Bechuana tribes 
to designate their vague ideas of a Supreme Being. 

Namaquas. — A tribe of South Africa inhabiting 
both banks of the Orange River near its mouth. 
Their country is divided into Great and Little 
Namaqualand, the latter now absorbed by Cape 
Colony. They speak the Nama, oldest and purest 
of Hottentot dialects. Their tribe is now small. 

Nek. — The rounded hollow of the dip between 
any two peaks of a mountain chain. Not a pass 
unless a road goes through it. 

Nyl. — A small river in Northern Transvaal; 
tributary of the Limpopo. 

Olifants. — This river rises in Southeastern 
Transvaal, flows north, and then east, and empties 
into the Limpopo in Gasaland, east of Transvaal. 
Its native name is Libalule. 

Ox Wagon, Boer. — These wagons are very large 
and powerful, about twenty feet long and six feet 
wide. The canvas cover is fastened to iron staples 
fixed in the wagon sides. A large chest, called the 
fore-chest, is fixed in the front part of the wagon ; 
another, the after-chest, at the rear, and the side- 
chest along the sides, all these fastened to the 
wagon with buffalo riems. Rows of canvas bags, 
called side pockets, are suspended along the sides of 
the cover for holding various articles. A cot, called 
cardell, eight feet long, and the breadth of the 


344 


GLOSSARY 


wagon, forms the traveler’s bed. A strong, wooden 
frame-work called the trap is suspended underneath 
the wagon, in which are stowed the pots and grid- 
irons. The wagon is steered by a pole called the 
dissel-boom, to the end of which is fastened the 
trek-tow, a stout rope of raw buffalo hide. The 
oxen are “ inspanned,” that is, hitched, and “ out- 
spanned,” unhitched. 

Palm, Fan. — The vegetable ivory palm. A tall, 
graceful palm, whose fruit is about the size of an 
apple, of a deep brown color, with a kernel as 
hard as a stone, and not unlike vegetable ivory. 

Partridge. — There are two species of part- 
ridge in South Africa, the red wing and gray wing. 
The Namaqua partridge, so called, is really a species 
of grouse. 

Pelargonium. — Stork’s bill. A genus of orna- 
mental plants allied to the geranium. 

Picho. — A native parliament. In some of the 
Bechuana tribes the chief’s power is restricted 
by a council of subordinate chiefs called the Picho. 
In this meeting the greatest plainness of speech is 
used in exposing what they consider culpable or lax 
in the ruling government. 

Secocoeni and Mapoch. — Chiefs of the Basutos, 
living northeast of the Transvaal. They were 
conquered by the Boers and the English. 

Serpa Pinto, Alexandre de. — A celebrated 


GLOSSARY 


345 


Portuguese explorer. His book, “ How I Crossed 
Africa,” was published in 1880. 

Seven-Leaved Silk-Cotton Tree. — A tree of 
the genus Bombax, growing to immense size, and 
having its seeds enveloped in a cottony substance. 

Sjambock (shambock). — This consists of a strip 
of the stoutest part of the hide of the rhinoceros 
or the hippopotamus. After being stretched on 
the ground, and when it has acquired a certain 
stiffness, the strip is subjected to a severe hammer- 
ing for the double purpose of condensing it and 
giving it a rounded shape. It is then reduced to 
the desired size by means of a knife or plane ; and 
lastly a piece of sandpaper or glass is employed to 
give it the finishing smoothness and polish. It is 
exceedingly hard and pliable, will inflict the most 
severe wounds and bruises, and will last for years. 
The price of one of these sjambocks in the colonies 
varies from eighteen pence to as much as eight or 
nine shillings. 

“ The Snake ” and “ The Bat.” — The incident 
here narrated is true. These outlaws belonged to 
the noted Africaner family, whose members were 
at one time a terror in every village in the neigh- 
borhood, but who were converted by the English 
missionary, Ebner. Later, Moffat worked several 
years at Africaner’s kraal. 

Snuff Boxes. — These were worn about the neck, 


346 


GLOSSARY 


and were formed of a tiny gourd trained to grow 
bottle-shaped. 

Stabbing Assagai. — This weapon is used for 
hand-to-hand conflict, and is thicker and shorter 
than the assagai. 

Steinboks. — The puruhuru of the Bechuanas ; 
is found abundantly in South Africa. It is a beau- 
tiful little antelope, and its flesh is finely flavored. 

Swaziland. — Lies north of Zululand and south- 
east of the Transvaal. The Swazi are a large 
tribe of what is sometimes called the Bantus, to 
which belong Kafirs, Zulus, Bechuanas, etc. 

Tamarind. — A leguminous tree of the genus 
Tamarindus. The trunk is lofty, large, and cov- 
ered with wide-spreading branches. Its fruit is 
highly valued. 

Trek (pronounced treck). — Go. 

Trek Oxen. — These are of enormous size and 
strength, the withers high, the tendency to hump 
pronounced. They are managed by strong, raw- 
hide reins bound to the horns. Their horns are of 
enormous size, measuring, frequently, eight and one- 
half feet from tip to tip. 

Tsecha. — A fur breech-cloth. 

Uitl anders. — Outlanders, foreigners; pronounced 
Ate-landers. 

Umvolosi. — The Black and White Umvolosi 
Hi vers both rise in the Transvaal and unite near 


GLOSSARY 


347 


the central part of Zululand, at Mainze-Kanze, 
forming the Umvolosi Iiiver, which empties into 
Santa Lucia Bay. 

Utrecht. — A city in the province of Utrecht, 
in southeastern Transvaal. 

Veldt. — The open country. 

Vier-Klor. — The Transvaal flag, three horizon- 
tal stripes of red, white, and blue, and a perpen- 
dicular stripe of green. 

Waterberg. — Mountain range in Central Trans- 
vaal. 

Whip, Boer. — This is a bamboo pole, twenty 
feet or more in length, with a thong twenty-five 
feet long, to the end of which is sewed “ rheimpys ” 
or strips of dressed steinbok skin, to which is fas- 
tened the “ fore slock,” which is about a yard in 
length, and is formed of a strip of the supple skin 
of a particular variety of antelope, prepared in a 
peculiar manner. 

Wildebeeste. — Brindled gnu ; a species of an- 
telope having the body, neck, and tail of a horse, 
and buffalo-like horns. 

Zulus. — Natives of South Africa living between 
Natal and Delagoa Bay, occupying -an interme- 
diary position between the negro and a higher 
type. Under a chief named Chaka, they overran 
the country a£ far as the southern border of Natal. 
Chaka was succeeded by Dingan and the latter by 


348 


GLOSSARY 


Panda. Under these chiefs the Zulus had a regular 
military organization, and it is said that as early 
as 1840 they could put 40,000 men in the field. 
They were greatly dreaded by the other South 
African tribes. 


'Best Books 

FOR ’BOYS AND GIRLS 


A SERIES of books for young 
people that contains the latest 
and best works of the most popular 
writers for boys and girls. The 
stories are not only told in an inter- 
esting and charming manner, but 
most of them contain something in 
the way of information or instruction, 
and all are of a good moral tone. For this reason they 
prove doubly good reading ; for, while the child is 
pleasantly employing his time, he is also improving his 
mind and developing his character. Nowhere can 
better books be found to put into the hands of young 
people. They are profusely and handsomely illustrated 
by the best artists and are well printed on good paper 
with exceedingly handsome and durable bindings. 

Sold by the leading booksellers everywhere, or sent 
prepaid on receipt of price. 

Cloth, each, ft. 25 

The Term Tublishing Company 

923 cARCH STREET THILADELPHlA 



1 


STORIES FOR GIRLS 


TheFerry cMaid of the Chattahoochee 

By cAnnie cM. 'Barnes Illustrated by Ida Waugh 

An heroic little Georgia girl, in her father’s extremity, takes 
charge of his ferry, and through many vicissitudes and several 
impending calamities, succeeds in carrying out her purpose of 
supporting her invalid parent and his family. The heroine’s 
cheerfulness and hearty good humor, combined with an un- 
flinching zeal in her determination to accomplish her work, 
make a character which cannot fail to appeal to young people. 

cA cMaid of the First Century 

By Lucy Foster SMadison Illustrated by Ida Waugh 

A little maid of Palestine goes in search of her father, who 
for political reasons, has been taken as a slave to Rome. She 
is shipwrecked in the Mediterranean, but is rescued by a 
passing vessel bound for Britain. Eventually an opportunity is 
afforded her for going to Rome, where, after many trying and 
exciting experiences, she and her father are united and his 
liberty is restored to him. 

o My Lady Barefoot 

By cMrs. Evelyn Raymond Illustrated by Ida Waugh 

A beautifully told story of the trials of a little backwoods girl 
who lives in a secluded place with an eccentric uncle, until his 
death. The privations she undergoes during his life-time, her 
search for other relatives, her rather uncongenial abode with 
them, her return to her early home to acquire her uncle’s 
estate, and thus to enjoy a useful and happy life, form a most 
interesting narrative of a girl whose ruggedness and simplicity 
of character must appeal to the admiration of all readers. 


2 


' Dorothy Day 

*By Julie cM. Lippmann Illustrated by Ida Waugh 

This is a most interesting story of a bright and spirited young 
girl whose widowed mother re-marries. The impulsive girl 
chafes under the new relationship, being unwilling to share 
with another the bounteous love of her mother which she had 
learned to claim wholly for her own. By the exercise of great 
tact and kindness, the obdurate Dorothy is at last won over, 
and becomes a most estimable girl. 

cMiss Wildfire 

Ey Julie cM. Lippmann Illustrated by Ida Waugh 

The story of a governess’ attempt to win the love and confi- 
dence of her ward, who, owing to a lack of early restraint, is 
inclined to be somewhat of a hoyden. The development of 
the girl’s character and her eventual victory over her turbu- 
lent disposition combine to form a story of unusual merit and 
one which will hold its reader’s eager attention throughout. 

“ A story of girls for girls that teaches a moral without 
labeling or tagging it at the end.” — Western Christian 
Advocate , Cincinnati, O. 

cAn Odd Little Lass 

'Ey Jessie E. Wright Illustrated by Ida Waugh 

This is a story of the regeneration of a little street waif. She 
begins life in a lowly court of a large city. Her adventures 
are numerous, and often quite exciting. After a time she 
is transplanted to the country, where alter many thrilling 
experiences she eventually grows into a useful and lovable 
young woman. The story is pleasantly told, and abounds 
in interesting incident. 

“The story is an intensely interesting one, and abounds in 
pleasing and unique situations .” — Religious Telescope , Dayton, 
Ohio. 


3 


I wo Wyoming Girls 

'Ey cMrs. Carrie L. cMarshall Illustrated by Ida Waugh 

Two girls, thrown upon their own resources, are obliged to 
“ prove up ” their homestead claim. This would be no very 
serious matter were it not for the persecution of an unscru- 
pulous neighbor, who wishes to appropriate the property to 
his own use. The girls endure many privations, have a num- 
ber of thrilling adventures, but finally secure their claim and 
are generally well rewarded for their courage and persever- 
ance. 

The Girl c Ranchers 

'Ey 8Mrs. Carrie L. cMarshall Illustrated by Ida Waugh 

A story of life on a sheep ranch in Montana. The dangers 
and difficulties incident to such a life are vividly pictured, and 
the interest in the story is enhanced by the fact that the ranch 
is managed almost entirely by two young girls. By their 
energy and pluck, coupled with courage, kindness, and un- 
selfishness they succeed in disarming the animosity of the 
neighboring cattle ranchers, and their enterprise eventually 
results successfully. 

cAn Every-Day Heroine 

'Ey cMary cA. Denison Illustrated by Ida Waugh 

The heroine is not an impossible character but only a pure, 
winsome, earnest girl, who at fourteen years of age is sud- 
denly bereft of fortune and father and becomes the chief sup- 
port of a semi-invalid mother. While there are many touching 
scenes, the story as a whole is bright and cheerful and moves 
forward with a naturalness and ease that carries its read- 
ers along and makes them reluctant to put down the book 
until the end is reached 


4 






























• - 































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































s'* ♦. 










































































































































LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 



0DD21t>4013A 



